Home

frame relay access unit model 9620/9621

1. 4 36 Configuring DLCI Records for Each Interface 2 2 000 4 41 Configuring PVG Gonnections esisi ririspiriiy irei inai ee heels 4 46 Setting Test Timeout and Duration Options 0220 eae 4 50 Configuring User Interface Options 0 cece eee eee 4 50 Setting Up the Communication Port 00202e ee eee eee 4 51 Setting Up the COM Port to Support an External Device 4 55 Setting Up to Support a Telnet and or FTP Session 4 58 Configuring ALANS si iia iaiia end Wh badd ea debe ae 4 61 Configuring Management and Communication Options 4 63 Communication Protocol ss oren goresan eee ga 4 63 Setting Up Management PVCs 2 02 tadenn eee 4 66 Setting Up for SNMP Management 00c cece nannan 4 70 Setting Up for SNMP NMS Security 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 4 71 Setting Up for SNMP Traps 2000 aaa eee eee eee 4 73 Configuring Auto Backup 0 0c cece eee teens 4 77 Restricting Auto Backup Based Upon the Time of Day 4 78 Setting Up An ISDN BRI DBM 42 000 cece sese ade enaeecenee da 4 79 Configure the ISDN BRI DBM Interface 2 2 000 4 80 Enter DLCI Records for the B Channel 20000005 4 81 Set Up Frame Relay for the B Channel 22 000s 4 81 Set Up the ISDN Call Profiles 0 00 0 ccc eee eee eens 4 82 Verify the ISON LEMOS coi
2. 000ee eee ee eee eee 5 31 DTE External Port Loopback 00 ccc a ee 5 32 212105 bo eee re ee eh cee ee ee ee eee eee 5 32 MOMOSI secare nsaan nee be meee tanwon eee obese 5 33 Device TESS ns heps rira pte Eaa a hehe EE E REEE 5 33 TOS UOO eesriie eae eee ete ate tee ee aed need ERRATI 5 34 Latching Loopback eost icrss Sees ee Ese See ae een eed 5 34 Starting and Stopping a TeSt sase cesereeie gem er aay desea inbh ai ee 5 35 Aborting All Tests 2 0 02 cee cerns ere eee ee roe eee eee ee 5 36 Determining Test Status and Results 0 cece cece eee ee 5 36 Downloading Software 00 cece eee eens 5 37 Pile WHANSICR sesi averse ney hese tanga he ike eee eee Cadet 5 37 Performing a NAM Upgrade cece eee ete eee neeeeees 5 39 Performing a DBM Upgrade 0 00 c cece eee ees 5 40 6 Security and Logins 9621 A2 GH30 00 IPMOGUCTION 2 3 02 siecd Gindd Maes Mende Madd Mh bd Mabe Rhee Ae ee Be 6 1 Liming ACCESS serores ao vahoevies ney Bboy ee nevwen caarew ene ee 6 1 Limiting Direct Async Terminal AccesS 000eeeeeeeee 6 1 Limiting Telnet ACCESS 00 ccc amea aaiae aa waha aa 6 3 Backup Secuii arisan iara iaia a a E a E EE E a 6 4 Controlling External COM Port Device Access 2 e000e 6 4 Controlling SNMP ACCESS 0ccce eee eet e eee nokis 6 5 Disabling SNMP ACCESS 000 e eee teens 6 5 Assigning SNMP Community Names and
3. 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 37 Setting Up 4 38 Table 4 5 Frame Relay Options 2 of 5 Inbound CIR Enforcement Mode Possible Settings Forced Standard Discard Default Setting Forced Monitors and enforces the CIR for the frames received inbound across the frame relay interface also known as traffic shaping Applies to all the DLCls configured for the interface CAUTION The frame relay network may discard frames that exceed the CIR Forced Monitors inbound DLCls for excessive CIR for statistics collection but CIR is not enforced All frames are sent Standard Monitors inbound DLCls for excessive CIR Discards frames that are marked DE exceed the CIR and are over the excess burst size Sets the DE bit on outbound frames that exceed the CIR and are over the excess burst size if the DE bit is not already set Discard Monitors inbound DLCls for excessive CIR Discards frames that exceed the CIR and are over the excess burst size regardless of the DE bit setting Outbound CIR Enforcement Mode Possible Settings Forced Standard Buffered Default Setting Forced Monitors and enforces the CIR for the frames transmitted outbound from the frame relay interface also known as traffic shaping Applies to all the DLCls configured for the interface CAUTION The frame relay network may discard frames that exceed the CIR Forced Monitors outbound DLCls but the CIR is not enfo
4. None No automatic configuration is used Configured manually by user default 4 14 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up 3 Save your selection 4 Go to the Configuration menu and change the data rates for the Network and Port interfaces 5 Change any node specific configuration options that may be needed Setting Up Automatic DLCI Configuration and Connection Select FR Discovery for automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver access unit The FR Discovery mode defaults to 1MPort When LMI is active on the network interface and the information on PVC status with provisioned DLCI numbers is next received from the Network service the system will automatically save to the Current Configuration area the settings listed in the following table You can change the Frame Relay Discovery mode at any time but no previously discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections are removed unless authorized Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery mode Selecting or changing a frame relay discovery method will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks either Configuration options set by a discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted via the Configuration menu NOTE Local Management PVCs e g between a router and the FrameSaver access unit s data port must be configured manually With 1MPort P
5. Controls whether external devices can dial in to the access unit through the COM port based on the Communication Use option setting Enable Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or IP network Disable Does not answer incoming calls Refer to the Control Characters table on page 4 57 August 1997 4 55 Setting Up Table 4 10 External Device COM Port Options 2 of 2 Connect Prefix Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the connect prefix to dial the directory phone number ASCII text entry Adds to or changes the connect prefix maximum 20 characters Refer to the Control Characters table on page 4 57 Clear Clears the connect prefix No connect prefix is used Refer to the Control Characters table on page 4 57 Connect Indication String Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the connect indication string that determines whether a connection is established The access unit searches the COM port s receive data stream for the connect indication string If not received within 1 minute the connection times out ASCII text entry Adds to or changes the connect indication string maximum 20 characters Refer to the Control Characters table on page 4 57 Clear Clears Connect Indication String The COM port s receive data stream is not searched and the Carrie
6. 3 Select a group of tests for an interface Network Port 1 Port 2 or BRI B1 PVC Test or Network Port 1 or Port 2 Physical Tests and press Return The selected test screen appears with the cursor positioned in the Command column of the first line available test Start or Stop appears in the Command column and Active or Inactive appears in the Status column based upon that interface s current test status Example Selecting Port 1 Physical Tests from the Test menu causes the Port 1 Physical Tests screen to appear Only the DTE External Loopback can be run from this screen The cursor is positioned on the Start Stop field in the Command column NOTE The cursor is not positioned in the Command column when Network PVC Tests is selected it is positioned in the DLC Number field 4 Select the test you want to start or stop and press Return The selected test for the interface changes from Stop to Start or from Stop to Start also changing the status of the test 5 Press Return again to start or stop the test 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 35 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Aborting All Tests Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to Network or DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting and Stopping a Test on page 5 35 gt Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu sequen
7. 4 Set the SNMP Management configuration option to Disable Disable is the factory default setting August 1997 6 5 Security and Logins 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information about SNMP configuration options Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 6 6 The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration options that allow the FrameSaver access unit to be managed by an SNMP manager supporting the SNMP protocol Use this screen to Assign the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the access unit s Management Information Base MIB Specify the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whenever an external SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the community name must be supplied B gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access levels 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From gt Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu sequence pressing Return after each s
8. Does not generate when an alarm when an out of service condition is detected on the Network interface Excessive BPV Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm is generated when excessive BPVs are detected Enable Generates an alarm when excessive BPVs are detected Disable Does not generate an alarm when excessive BPVs are detected August 1997 4 33 Setting Up Setting Up the ISDN BRI DBM Interface s Physical Options Select Physical to display or change the physical configuration options for the ISDN BRI DBM see Table 4 4 once ISDN Call Profiles have been setup see Creating Displaying or Changing ISDN Call Profiles in Chapter 5 Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN BRI DBM Physical B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN BRI DBM 2 The ISDN BRI B Channel screen appears Enable or disable ISDN BRI bearer channel 1 BRI B1 3 Select Physical to change or display the physical configuration options for the enabled ISDN BRI bearer channel Table 4 4 ISDN BRI DBM Options 1 of 2 BRI B1 Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the ISDN BRI DBM Bearer channel 1 B1 is active so it can initiate or answer backup calls on the ISDN network interface Enable Activates the DBM s Bearer channel Disable Deactivates the DBM
9. Frame Controller Relay 7 j IBM FEP Z g vee H Relay Router Frame FR Frame Relay Relay Physical Connection Router eeiec ise PVC Connection aE If only one port is used per remote 9620 access unit and management DLCls are not always used e g management through the router at the remote site the 9120 access unit could handle more than 80 remote sites It could support up to 321 DLCls with up to 81 management DLCls 3 2 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Frame Relay Router Frame Frame Relay FR Relay FR Frame Relay Network Router Typical Applications Circuit multiplexing is a proprietary method that provides the ability to multiplex frame relay frames coming from multiple DLCls onto a single DLCI sharing a single PVC connection As shown in the example central site data compression is provided through a 9028 compression unit CU which is connected to the 9120 access unit s COM port The 9028 CU is a high performance frame relay compliant fractional T1 FT1 processor that provides compression rates up to 4 to 1 It was developed to work in conjunction with a 9120 access unit to provide high speed compression decompression capability At the remote sites the access unit s compression feature is used which provides data compression on Port 1 Refer to the 9028 Compression Unit Installation and User s Manual for more information PBX Frame Re
10. Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 65 Setting Up Setting Up Management PVCs Select Management PVCs to define in band management links by m Adding or changing Management PVCs for the FrameSaver access unit Assigning the PVCs to the frame relay interface B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs 2 Select New or Modify from the Management PVCs screen to add or change DLCI and EDLCI logical links When you select New the configuration option field is blank When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID that you specified 3 Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar The first valid selection appears in the field See Table 4 14 for Management PVCs configuration options Table 4 14 Management PVCs Options 1 of 4 Name Possible Settings ASCII text entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g Tpa for
11. m frDcpRxThrPut frDcpDiciEntry 8 frDcpStatsClearAll frDcpDiciEntry 12 IP Route Table devIPRouteTable JD ip 1 The IP routing table devIPRoute mib is used to manage IP routes All routes appear on this table and are fully supported with the following exceptions Object Description Setting Contents ipRouteType deviPRoute Entry 8 Can be used to delete an IP route Set its value to invalid 2 to delete an IP route ipRouteAge deviPRoute Entry 10 Reflects the value of the time to live for the route in seconds Supported as read only C 40 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps This appendix describes the FrameSaver access unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features The FrameSaver access unit supports the following user interface traps along with several enterprise specific traps warmStart authenticationFailure m linkUp m linkDown These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table Trap warmStart Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmStart Access unit has just Reset command sent reinitialized and stabilized itself Power disruption 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 D 1 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Trap authenticationFailure Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure
12. Call Retry Enable Disable Dial Out Delay Time Min 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Alternate Dial Out Directory None 1 2 3 4 5 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Management and Communication Configuration Worksheets Communication Protocol Options Worksheet 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Worksheets Record the settings for the Management and Communication configuration options on the following worksheets Communication Protocol Configuration Worksheet Management PVCs Configuration Worksheet General SNMP Management Configuration Worksheet SNMP NMS Security Configuration Worksheet SNMP Traps Configuration Worksheet Auto Backup Criteria Configuration Worksheet Use this worksheet to record configuration options that enable management communication with the node Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Communication Protocol Device Name Refer to Communication Protocol Options Table 4 13 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Node IP Address Node Subnet Mask Default Network Destination None COM PVCname Communication Port IP Address Subnet Mask Link Protocol PPP SLIP Alternate IP Address Alternate Subnet Mask August 1997 B 13 Configuration Worksheets Management PVCs Options Worksheet Use this worksheet to record up to 40 mana
13. FR Router Frame 135 18 2 1 Relay 135 18 3 3 Network Subnet 135 18 1 0 SNMP NMS FR Router Subnet 135 18 3 0 135 18 2 3 Subnet 135 18 2 0 FR Frame Relay Physical Connection 97 14989 01 PVC Connection 2 12 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Management Control and IP Addressing The following illustration is a more complex example in which each access unit is on its own subnet having a subnet mask of FF FF FF 00 This subnet is independent of the subnet on the LAN supported by the local router Subnet Subnet 135 18 5 0 Subnet 135 18 1 0 135 18 5 2 Ei az 8 135 18 2 0 FR Router 135 18 2 1 FR Router 135 18 1 1 FR Router Subnet Subnet 135 18 6 0 Frane 135 18 4 1 Relay 13319 90 135 18 6 2 Network 135 18 4 2 FR Router FR Router Subnet 135 18 4 0 135 18 3 1 135 18 6 1 FREE Rel Physical Connection Frame Rela PVC Connection 97 14914 01 Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks Once you select an IP scheme assign an address or addresses to the access unit If using Then COM portas a Assign the COM port address and net mask management interface i Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management amp Communication Communication Protocol COM port connected toan Configure an IP address and subnet mask to dial out traps external modem using the alarm directory Men
14. Object Description Setting Contents rs232AsyncPort Specifies the number of bits Supports only the following values Bits in a character m 7 7 bitch rs232Async 7 bit characters PortEntry 2 8 8 bit characters rs232AsyncPort Specifies the number of Supports only the following values StopBits stop bits supported AAS p pp m one 1 One stop bit PortEntry 3 m two 2 Two stop bits rs232AsyncPort Specifies the type of parity Supports only the following values Parity used by the port rs232Async m none 1 No parity bit PortEntry 4 m odd 2 Odd parity m even 3 Even parity rs232AsyncPort Specifies the ability to Supports only the following value AutoBaud automatically sense the disabled 2 D rs232Async input speed of the port Ma ed 2 Does not support PortEntry 5 utobaud August 1997 C 31 MIB Descriptions Synchronous Port Table C 32 The Synchronous Port Table contains an entry for each of the synchronous data ports and the COM port when the port is configured for synchronous operation For this access unit entries in the table that are counters rs232SyncPortEntry 3 to 7 are used to collect statistics only and are not supported Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSaver access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents rs232SyncPort Specifies the clock source Supports only the f
15. Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver frame relay access units This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on the Network interface August 1997 4 69 Setting Up Setting Up for SNMP Management Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver access unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management See Table 4 15 for General SNMP Management configuration options Table 4 15 General SNMP Management Options 1 of 2 SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the access unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The access unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the access unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters
16. B 8 alarms auto backup DLCI records frame relay B 6 general management and communication B 13 physical oreo ES user interface configuring DLCI connection example 3 6 end to end management control external device local management management DLCI the access unit congestion control Connect Indication String Prefix 4 56 Connection Failure Alarm 4 29 PVC MIB group C 28 connectivity 5 30 IP connector ElIA 232E ports pin assignments 9621 A2 GH30 00 Index Control characters congestion Leads Ignore goe gal controlling external device access 6 4 SNMP access 6 5 copyrights A CPE n fa CRC definition creating a login a separate management ink Ps additional DLCI records ISDN call profiles 5 9 new PVC connections management links Cross Pair Detection Alarm 4 32 CSA CSU definition ene eh CTS definition GL 2 Flow Control signaling CU customer specified storage areas D D channel data port rates data compression application troubleshooting problems 5 21 Data Link Connection Identifier Status Change Alarm 4 41 Control Identifier DLCI Data Rate Kbps 4 52 DBM 1 15 configuration worksheet B 5 definition GL 2 ISDN BRI physical options 4 34 upgrade August 1997 IN 3 Index DCE definition DDS access to frame relay definition Line Rate Kbps physical network Operating Mode
17. Index Send 511 test pattern test pattern serial line internet protocol SLIP Service A Profile ID SPID Session Access Level how to start stop Set DE setting up access unit considerations when management configuration Short Packet Bypass shortcuts 1 signal input output MIB table SLIP definition protocol SNMP assigning community names access levels definition GL 6 dialing out traps limiting access Management MIB group object test commands NMS security options worksheet Number of Managers selecting traps Traps standards compliance supported worksheet software configurable ports download downloading 5 37 Source Profile 14 47 IN 10 August 1997 specifications technical SPID standards compliance SNMP traps start stop a session starting a test 5 35 statistics clearing how to display performance Status DLCI Change Alarm 4 41 Enquiry cote aed LMI Link LMI Link Change Alarm messages selecting port for LED monitoring Stop Bits stopping a test 5 35 storage areas Subnet assigning IP addresses one masks 2 13 routing using different 2 11 routing using same a Subnet Mask Node ea Switch Type 4 34 switching sania Synchronous definition GL 6 port MIB table Port Type System group MIB T T1 LMI Heartbeat overview T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T3 LMI N4 Measureme
18. Management name network loopback 5 28 tests troubleshooting problems 5 22 PVC tests available Q quality of service Quick Reference kii R rate variable clock rates Ratio Compression 1 13 receive address MIB table C 12 receiver GL 5 recording a Fl regulatory information related documents remote access units minimal configuration on same subnet using different subnets 2 11 using direct PVCs using routers management 9621 A2 GH30 00 Index resetting statistics the access m ES COM port default configuration options 5 16 restoring user interface access RFC 1213 and 1573 MIB descriptions RFC 1315 frame relay MIB descriptions RFC 1490 compliant routers for transparent management RFC 1604 frame relay service MIB descriptions RFC 1659 RS 232 like MIB descriptions RIP definition RJ45 backup cable RJ48S network cable router GL 6 Routing Information Protocol RIP 4 52 on same subnet using different subnets 2 11 using routers RS 232 like MIB RTS Control Leads Supported definition RXC definition RXD definition S safety information instructions C saving configuration options 4 12 SDC definition SDLC definition security SNMP NMS options 4 71 selecting a port for LED monitoring an IP addressing scheme management interface SNMP Traps August 1997 IN 9
19. The port is a V 35 compatible DCE A V 35 compatible DTE can be connected to the access unit port using the EIA 530A to V 35 adapter cable MS34 socket to plug 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 25 Setting Up 4 26 Table 4 1 Port Options 2 of 3 Port Rate Kbps Possible Settings 4 8 9 6 14 4 16 8 19 2 24 28 8 38 4 48 56 and 64 kbps for EIA232 ports or 4 8 9 6 14 4 16 8 19 2 24 28 8 38 4 48 56 64 128 192 and 256 kbps for V 35 ports Default Setting 56 Specifies the bit rate for the port in kilobits NOTES Changing settings for this configuration option causes the access unit to abort any active frame relay tests When Compression is enabled and Flow Control is set to Clock see Flow Control configuration option on page 4 30 the port rate specified here is the maximum clock rate allowed for the port When Compression is disabled port speeds greater than 64 kbps should only be used to help reduce latency in transaction processing environments since the network interface is only 64 kbps Higher speeds should only be used for bursty data 4 8 64 kbps Sets the EIA 232 port type s bit rate from 4 8 to 64 kbps 4 8 256 kbps Sets the V 35 port type s bit rate from 4 8 to 256 kbps Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked internally by
20. can be used for the rest of the objects A get only returns the first object Max Frame Size Objects Two MIB objects are supported one for ingress into the frame relay network and one for egress Supports only a single frame size for both directions so the following objects contain the same value of 2048 m frPVCEndptInMaxFrameSize frPVCEndptEntry 2 m frPVCEndptOutmaxFrame Size frPVCEndptEntry 6 Committed Burst Size Objects Two MIB objects are supported one for ingress into the frame relay network and one for egress Supports only a single committed burst size for both directions so both objects will contain the same value The objects are m frPVCEndptlnBc frPVCEndptEntry 3 m frPVCEndptOutBc frPVCEndptEntry 7 Excess Burst Size Objects There are two MIB objects for excess burst size one for ingress into the frame relay network and one for egress direction Indicates the maximum amount of uncommitted data bits that the network will attempt to deliver over the measured interval of 1 second The value of the following objects are m frPVCEndptlnBe frPVCEndptEntry 4 m frPVCEndptOutBe frPVCEndptEntry 8 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Object Description Setting Contents Committed Information Rate Objects There are two MIB objects for Committed Information rate CIR one for ingress into t
21. m Used for COM port when port configured for PPP m Used for COM port when port configured for SLIP Used for frame relay sublayers of the DDS network interface synchronous data ports and B channel 1 when configured for the DTE side of the frame relay UNI or when no LMI is configured Used for the COM port when the port is not configured as a network communication link and synchronous data ports when configured as EIA232 Used for frame relay sublayers of the DDS network interface synchronous data ports and B channel 1 when configured for the Service side of the frame relay UNI or when no LMI is configured m Used for Ports 1 and 2 configured for connection to a V 35 DTE cable Supported values m other 1 m basicISDN 20 m ppp 23 m slip 28 m frameRelay 32 m 15232 33 m frameRelayService 44 m v35 45 ifMtu ifEntry 4 Identifies the largest datagram that can be sent or received on an interface Interfaces DDS network 2048 m Ports 1 and 2 2048 COM port 1500 Frame Relay Sublayers 2048 ISDN BRI B channels 2048 All other interfaces 0 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 C 5 MIB Descriptions C 6 Object Description Setting Contents ifSpeed ifEntry 5 Provides the current bandwidth for the interface in bits per second Interfaces DDS network Line rate of 56 000 or 64 000 bps reflecting the line rate det
22. 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps NMS n IP Address appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager The first digit i e nnn 255 255 255 can be any number from 001 through 223 excluding 127 Remaining digits i e 255 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears the IP address and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Destination Possible Settings Default COM PVCname Default Setting Default Specifies the network destination for the Trap Manager number configuration option Destination appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Default Uses the default network COM Uses the COM port This selection only appears if the Communication Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link PVCname The management PVCname name of the management PVC This selection only appears when at least one management PVC is defined for the node 4 74 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 17 SNMP Traps Options 2 of 3 General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both
23. 4 10 The FrameSaver access unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the m Quick Reference included with the User s Guide Configuration option tables in this chapter Configuration worksheets in Appendix B If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application To change configuration option settings you must perform the following tasks Access and display configuration option settings m Change configuration option settings Save configurations option settings to a configuration option area NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration options or run tests The FrameSaver access unit offers four configuration option storage areas located in the following areas Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The access unit s set of currently active configuration options Customer Configuration 1 The first of two alternate sets of configurations that can be set up by the customer and stored for future use Customer Configurat
24. Conventions Used 9621 A2 GH30 00 Convention Used Italic Menu selection sequence Path Brackets About This Manual When Used To indicate variable information e g Port n indicating Port 1 or 2 To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step e g Main Menu Status System and Test Status To provide a check point that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm To indicate multiple selection choices when multiple options can be displayed e g Clear Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 Statistics August 1997 xi About This Manual Related Documents Document Number Document Title Purpose Focus 9621 A2 GB20 FrameSaver 9620 User s Guide Provides feature user interface log in and out session start and stop information as well as how to display information Includes status statistics and LEDs information as well as alarms and messages Includes a Quick Reference for easy navigation through menus and a summary of the configuration options 9621 A2 GN10 FrameSaver 9620 Network Access Module NAM Installation Instructions Describes how to install a NAM ina 1 slot housing Includes cabling operation verification
25. DLCI nnnn Loopback BRI Y Y Y Y Y Y y2 y2 DLCI nnnn Loopback Pattern Network y2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Tests DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Network Y y2 Y Y Y Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Port 1 Y Y y2 Y Y Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Port 1 Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Port 2 Y Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Port 2 Y Y Y Y Y y2 Y Y DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern BRI Y Y Y Y Y Y y2 Y DLCI nnnn Send Pattern BRI Y Y Y Y Y Y Y y2 DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Connectivity Network y2 y2 Y Y Y Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Port 1 Y Y y2 y2 Y Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Port 2 Y Y Y Y y2 y2 Y Y DLCI nnnn BRI Y Y Y Y Y Y y2 y2 DLCI nnnn 2 Tests can be run together as long as they are run on different DLCIs 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 27 Troubleshooting and Maintenance PVC Tests Refer to Chapter 5 Device Error of the FrameSaver 9620 User s Guide to interpret test messages PVC tests can be run on the following interfaces for the requested DLCI m Network m Port 1 and 2 BRI B1 Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver access units should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests CAUTION PVC tests between 9x20 9x21 FrameSaver access units on a multiplexed DLCI are non disruptive to data and data can be sent while a test is running If the device at one end
26. Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether data on a selected DLCI is compressed and identifies the DLCls on Port 1 that should not be compressed DLCI Compression does not appear if Compression is disabled on Port 1 and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous see Table 4 2 Enable Compresses and decompresses this DLCI s data Up to six Port 1 DLCls can be configured for compression Disable Does not compress and decompress this DLCI s data Data is treated as standard frame relay information DLCI Compr Ratio Alarm Threshold Possible Settings 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 0 1 Default Setting 1 0 1 Specifies the compression ratio alarm threshold for the selected DLCI An alarm is triggered for this DLCI if the dynamically measured compression ratio falls below the ratio specified by this configuration option 1 0 1 Sets a ratio threshold of 1 0 to 1 2 0 1 Sets a ratio threshold of 2 0 to 1 3 0 1 Sets a ratio threshold of 3 0 to 1 4 0 1 Sets a ratio threshold of 4 0 to 1 August 1997 4 45 Setting Up Configuring PVC Connections Select PVC Connections to display or change the configuration options for the PVC connections see Table 4 7 You can configure up to 80 PVC connections B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration PVC Connections 2 The PVC Configuration Table screen appears Select New or Modify from the PVC Configuration
27. E 4 The backup connection is through the BKP interface connector which is an RJ45 8 position keyed modular jack The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each The backup connection is through the BKP interface connector which is an RJ45 8 position keyed modular jack The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Pin Number Transmit Receive ring to from the local loop R R1 4 Transmit Receive tip to from the local loop T T1 5 RJ48C DA15P Plug Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring 1 Receive Ring Receive TIP Receive TIP White Blue Transmit Ring Orange White Blue Orange Transmit TIP White Orange N O oO A WO PD White Orange Transmit Ring Transmit TIP August 1997 493 14342 01 9621 A2 GH30 00 EIA 232E Port 1 or 2 Interface 9621 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments The following table shows the EIA 232E circuit and pin assignments that are supported for a port connector interface Port 1 or Port 2 25 Pin Circuit ITU EIA 232E Signal Mnemonic CCITT Direction Pin Shield 1 Transmitted Data TXD BA 103 To DCE 2 Received Data RXD BB 104 From DCE 3 Request to Send RTS CA 105 To DCE 4 Clear to Send CTS CB 106 From DCE 5 Data Set or DCE Ready DSR CC
28. FRAUUICS iaa AE Baad Ahead gn EE ah hae Hees 1 2 SNMP Management Capabilities 0 ccc eee 1 8 MIB SUPPO aca a esac nate estes ecient n aa a e aaa E ae e Raia aaa 1 8 COM Port Supported Link Layer Protocols 0005 1 8 About Congestion COntiGl 0 0000 needs caches E bee A eels 1 9 About Data Compression 0 cece eee eee eee eee e eee 1 11 TONON ea eee Pee ee ere 1 12 PROtOCO MOES orrore nce ihe eee ana eee ee aa 1 12 Compression RatioS i cece eee eee eee eee 1 13 Determining a Flow Control Method 0002 ee eee eee 1 13 Short Packets Bypass i esci ccriircrdi cordes udi ae ee ieee 1 13 Optimizing Operation aia ceisndvrew dbase des ace bewaweee eer acted 1 13 About Configuration Shortcuts 0c cece cece eee eens 1 14 About AIMS ii0 ci ceeae el ee ied te RG whet ede de athe Ries 1 15 ABOUT BACKUP 222 cice endet ahebewide te diel weds eid dew ANE 1 15 Backup PMiloSOp MGS cacti cee horde wade Sanne aa ee ie 1 16 Using an ISDN BRI DBM o 3 ceca cee ned en een cue ered ete 1 17 Using an External Modem or Other Backup Device 1 18 August 1997 i Contents 2 Management Control and IP Addressing Configuring Local Management Control 00 ccc ee eee neces 2 1 Configuring a Management DLC Between the Router and Access Unit RFC 1490 Router Using DTE Port 2 0000 2 2 Creating a Separate Management Link Non RFC 1490 Router Using COM
29. Loopbacks DLCI nnnn Loopback Port 1 Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y DLCI nnnn Loopback Port 2 Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y DLCI nnnn Loopback BRI Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 DLCI nnnn Loopback Pattern Tests Network y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Network y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Port 1 Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Port 1 Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Port 2 Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Port 2 Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern BRI Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 DLCI nnnn Send Pattern BRI Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Connectivity Network y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Port 1 Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y DLCI nnnn Port 2 Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 Y DLCI nnnn BRI Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y y2 DLCI nnnn 2 Tests can be run together as long as they are run on different DLCIs 5 26 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Test Matrix 4 of 4 Test Category Logical and Logical Test Type Logical Pattern Tests Network Network Port 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 2 BRI BRI DLCI DLCI DLCI DLCI DLCI DLCI DLCI DLCI Test nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn Logical Send Monitor Send Monitor Send Monitor Send Monitor Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern PVC Network y2 y2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Loopbacks DLCI nnnn Loopback Port 1 Y Y y2 y2 Y Y Y Y DLCI nnnn Loopback Port 2 Y Y Y Y y2 y2 Y Y
30. MIB Descriptions Device Configuration MIB devConfig D common 7 The variable devConfigAreaCopy under the devConfigArea group devConfig mib is supported This variable allows the entire contents of one configuration area to be copied into another configuration area The FrameSaver access unit only supports the following values Object Description Setting Contents devConfigArea A get of this object will noOp 1 Copy always return noOp Copy from active area to customer 1 area active to customer1 2 Copy from active area to customer 2 area active to customer2 3 Copy from customer 1 area to active area customer to active 4 Copy from customer 1 area to customer 2 area customer to customer2 5 Copy from customer 2 area to active area customer2 to active 6 Copy from customer 2 area to customer 1 area customer2 to customer1 7 Copy from factory area to active area factory 1 to active 8 Copy from factory area to customer 1 area factory 1 to customer1 9 Copy from factory area to customer 2 area factory 1 to customer2 10 Port Usage Table devPortUsage JD interfaces 3 The Port Usage table devPortUsage mib specifies whether the COM port is configured for the asynchronous terminal interface ASCII alarms or as an SNMP management link The value other 4 is not supported for the COM port C 36 August 1997 9
31. PVC ID PVC ID PVC ID PVC ID PVC ID Source Link Source DLCI Source EDLCI Primary Destination Link Primary Destination DLCI Primary Destination EDLCI Alternate Destination Link Alternate Destination DLCI Alternate Destination EDEGI Alternate Destination Profile B 8 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Worksheets General Options Configuration Worksheet 9621 A2 GH30 00 Use this worksheet to record the general configuration options to limit the time that a a test will run Main Menu gt Configuration General Device Name Refer to General Configuration Option Table 4 8 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Test Timeout Enable Disable Test Duration min 1 120 10 August 1997 B 9 Configuration Worksheets User Interface Options Configuration Worksheets Record the settings for the User Interface configuration options on the following worksheets Communication Port Configuration Worksheet External Device Configuration Worksheet Telnet and FTP Session Configuration Worksheet Communication Port Options Worksheet B 10 Use this worksheet to record COM port configuration option settings Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface Communication Port Device Name Refer to Communication Port Options Table 4 9 Conf
32. Two flow control methods are supported Variable Clock Rate Varies the clock rate to match the current compression ratio This is the recommended method and should be used when the DTE is compatible with clock rate control CTS Signaling Uses CTS to prevent the DTE from sending more data than can be handled by the access unit Used only when the DTE is not compatible with clock rate control See the Port 1 Compression configurations in Chapter 4 for more information Short Packets Bypass A short packet is a packet that contains less than 80 bytes of data The FrameSaver 9620 can be configured to bypass compression of short packets when they occur to minimize overhead and latency in polled protocol environments and to improve performance in environments where short packets are predominant You may want to experiment with enabling and disabling this configuration option to determine which setting optimizes performance given your network s traffic patterns Optimizing Operation Performance can be further optimized using the Optimize Based On configuration option Selecting Throughput Optimizes compression to increase throughput the amount of data transferred Latency Optimizes compression to decrease latency the time it takes to transfer data from its source to its destination 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 1 13 About the FrameSaver 9620 About Configuration Shortcuts 1 14 Configuration shortc
33. frCircuitCommitted Burst frCircuit Entry 12 Indicates the maximum amount of data in bits that the network agrees to transfer under normal conditions during the measurement interval Corresponds to the Committed Information Rate CIR frCircuitExcess Burst frCircuitEntry 13 Indicates the maximum amount of uncommitted data bits that the network will attempt to deliver over the measurement interval interval 1 second Corresponds to the Excess Burst Size Bits configuration option frCircuit Throughput frCircuitEntry 14 Indicates the average number of bits per second of frame relay information transferred across the network interface in one direction measured over the measurement interval Read only August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Error Group Global Objects 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions The Error Group consists of the Error Table which contains an entry for each frame relay interface that describes errors found on each interface Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSaver access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents frErrType Indicates the type of error Supports only the following values frErrEntry 2 that was last seen on this aink E 1 frame relay interface unknownError 1 m receiveShort 2 m receiveLong 3 m illegalDLCl 4 m unknownDLCl 5 dicmiProtoErr 6 m dicmiUnknownlE 7
34. gt main contig save Not Allowed Customer Configuration 1 main conftig load devConfigAreaCopy gt customer to active gt main contig save 4 78 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Setting Up An ISDN BRI DBM Before starting obtain the following information Verification that you have NI 1 ISDN service Verification of 1B D service Verification of CNIS calling number Identification service for both the originating and answering units SPID service profile identification Actual phone number associated with the SPID Number of digits used for the Called ID or Calling ID the ISDN Call Profile formats Example A 10 digit format with the area code included may be used for the Calling ID 8135309999 while a 7 digit format without the area may be used for the Called ID 5309999 When configuring The FrameSaver access units with the ISDN BRI DBM option installed remember that If the one ISDN BRI DBM was configured to originate backup the other ISDN BRI DBM must be configured to answer a backup call see Table 4 4 the ISDN BRI DBM s physical options page 4 34 If the one ISDN BRI DBM had been configured as the user side of LMI LMI Personality the other ISDN BRI DBM must be configured as the network side see Table 4 5 the ISDN BRI DBM s frame relay options page 4 37 Print or copy the worksheets needed from Appendix B and transfer this information to the appropriate config
35. m dicmiSequenceErr 8 m noErrorSinceReset 10 frErrData Contains an octet string up Octet string frErrEntry 3 to 4 bytes long This string represents the first 4 bytes of the last frame that was in error The global objects are m Frame Relay Trap State Not supported The value is always noSuchName DLCI Status Change Trap Not supported August 1997 C 21 MIB Descriptions Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 The frameRelayService object defined by RFC 1604 is supported for both the Network and the synchronous data ports when the interface is configured to support the service side of the frame relay UNI An interface is considered to support the service side when the LMI Personality configuration option is set to Network Side RFC 1604 is an SNMPv2 MIB but is converted to an SNMPv1 MIB to support this access unit The Frame Relay Service MIB consists of seven groups and one object Logical Port Group Management VC Signaling Group m PVC End Point Group m PVC Connection Group Not supported m Accounting Group Not supported m frPVCConnectlndex Value Object Not supported m frNetServObjects Group Limited support m frNetServTraps Group Not supported C 22 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Logical Port Group MIB Descriptions The Logical Port Group consists of the Frame Relay Port Information table Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSav
36. s output Same as rs232PortInSpeed Speed speed in bits per second rs232PortEntry 6 rs232PortInFlow Type rs232PortEntry 7 Contains the port s type of input flow control Supports the following values m none 1 No flow control m ctsRts 2 Indicates that CTS is being used for flow control Also indicates that both CTS and DTR are being used for flow control dsrDTR 3 Only DTR is being used for flow control NOTE The above settings are mutually exclusive There is no way to set the value Both to ignore both control leads If Both is the current setting in the unit the value returned for this object is ctsRts 2 rs232PortOutFlow Type rs232PortEntry 8 Contains the port s type of output flow control Supports only the following value m none 1 No flow control August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Asynchronous Port Table 9621 A2 GH30 00 The Asynchronous Port Table contains an entry for the COM port when the port is configured for asynchronous operation The Asynchronous Port Table is not supported for the synchronous data ports This object is supported for the COM port only For this access unit entries in the table that are counters rs232AsyncPortEntry 6 to 8 are used to collect statistics only and are not supported Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the access unit is provided below
37. technical specifications and pin assignments 9000 A2 GN10 1 Slot Assembled Access Unit Installation Instructions Describes how to install a fully assembled 1 slot access unit Includes technical specifications 9000 A2 GN11 1 Slot Access Unit Wall Mounting Kit Installation Instructions Describes how to install the mounting hardware with an access unit so the 1 slot assembled unit can be mounted onto the wall Includes technical specifications 9000 A2 GN13 Power Cord Transformer Installation Instructions Describes how to install the power cord and transformer for a 1 slot unit Includes technical specifications 9000 A2 GN21 Universal Power Supply Installation Instructions Describes how to install the universal power supply transformer and the power cord for a 1 slot unit used outside the United States and Canada Includes technical specifications 9000 A2 GN19 ISDN BRI Dial Backup Module DBM Installation Instructions Describes how to install a DBM ona NAM Includes cabling operation verification technical specifications and pin assignments 9621 A2 GX40 FrameSaver 962x Safety and Regulatory Warranty and Service Information Provides safety and regulatory and warranty and service information xii August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 Overview 9621 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver 9620 access unit provides an interface be
38. 00 Typical Applications Backup Applications Backup provides continuing service in case of a network LMI or PVC failure Being a frame relay aware product the FrameSaver access unit continually monitors the frame relay physical and logical links to detect these failures If the automatic backup feature is enabled backup occurs immediately and automatically when a failure is detected without operator intervention or the delay of waiting for the LMI to time out when using a router for backup To provide backup the FrameSaver access unit must be equipped with either an internal ISDN BRI DBM connected to the ISDN through the backup BKP interface which provides an ISDN U interface or an external backup device connected to a DTE port Directories or profiles must be set up Alternate destination options must be configured m One end of the circuit must be configured to originate backup while the other end must be configured to answer a backup call One side of LMI must be configured for the Network Side LMI Personality on the alternate destination link and the other end must be configured for User Side Here is how backup works 1 When a network LMI or PVC failure is detected the FrameSaver access unit generates an alarm which triggers an SNMP Trap 2 If the unit is configured for automatic backup and an alternate destination circuit has been configured the FrameSaver access unit places a call to the answe
39. 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 4 9 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you can view or edit The first digit i e 29N 255 255 255 can be any number from 001 through 223 excluding 127 Remaining digits i e 255 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 13 Communication Protocol Options 3 of 3 Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 4 9 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Lin
40. 107 From DCE 6 Signal Ground Common SG AB 102A 7 Received Line Signal Detector CF 109 From DCE 8 RLSD or LSD Reserved for future use 9 Not used 10 Reserved for future use 11 Reserved for future use 12 Not used 13 Reserved for future use 14 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DB 114 From DCE 15 TXC Reserved for future use 16 Receiver Signal Element Timing DD 115 From DCE 17 RXC Local Loopback LL LL 141 To DCE 18 Not used A 19 Data Terminal or DTE Ready CD 108 1 2 To DCE 20 DTR Not used 21 Ring Indicator RI RI 125 From DCE 22 Not used _ 23 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DA 113 To DCE 24 TT Test Mode Indicator TM TM 142 From DCE 25 August 1997 E 5 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments V 35 DTE Adapter Cable 3100 F2 570 Used as an interface between the 25 position Port 1 or Port 2 connector and a DTE s V 35 connector 12 Inches 25 Pin Plug Connector 34 Position Socket Connector 496 14882a E 6 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments The following table provides the pin assignments for the 25 position Port 1 or Port 2 connector interface and a DTE s V 35 connector 25 Pin 34 Pin ITU Plug Socket Signal CCITT Pin Direction Pin Shield 1 A Signal Groun
41. 17 Circuit GOUD ee bake hh eae eee he eae A C 19 Emor GrOU Dl cinkedt dive sade oideesiedreadtes Serbs ee tee Sadhe we C 21 GIG PalOBlACS a4 el ieee sae eee inden E eee C 21 Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 0c ccc eee eee eens C 22 Logical Porn GOUD ss kederin nnen Cote ane ee eats hee le ds C 23 Management VC Signaling Group 020 ce cece eee eee C 24 PVC Biid POIUGKOUD iac issi tiaa oi ete ee he C 26 PYG Conmection Group 0c 2 c abewss 4 ob novelas Ita s C 28 RS 232Like MIB APG 1659 occ ce vieaiw eich vee aaa nares fee a C 29 Number of RS 232 Like POS 2 0c e8eerdes a beeeehieeee ees C 29 General Port TaBe was wasn nae nin ini a a E abe be hades bee ca C 29 Asynchronous Port Table 2 2 2 i a ences hens eee eee ee es C 31 SYMENMONOUS Port Table seica ee neh eaa deena a C 32 Input Signal Table reire niare ey ee a oa wee eee els C 33 Output Signal Table s0 cnacgaekep ere deusep eked ead ates os C 34 ENtorprisO MIB uscd eaneeeonss epee R ee ened ea knee ana eae teas C 35 Device Configuration MIB devConfig ID common 7 C 36 Port Usage Table devPortUsage ID interfaces 3 C 36 DDS Interface Specific Definitions dds ID interfaces 2 C 37 Device Security Table D security ID common 8 C 39 Device Traps Table ID traps ID common 9 00 C 39 Device Control Object D control ID common 10 C 39 Device Health and
42. 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 Using an ISDN BRI DBM 9621 A2 GH30 00 Available as an optional feature the ISDN BRI DBM supports a variety of backup schemes The access unit itself supports various LMI types and provides switching capability Combined with the ISDN BRI DBM s capabilities better faster and easier backup can be achieved Order 1B D service from your LEC local exchange carrier which supports one circuit switched B channel with one SPID service profile identification number and one local phone number m CNIS calling network identification service for both the originating and answering units which provides calling number identification for data traffic on the B channel When installed and enabled the ISDN BRI DBM m Uses a B channel for backup creating an alternate data path that goes to a different destination A B channel can be configured to support the user or network side of the LMI and different LMI types It can also be configured as a source or a primary destination not just an alternate backup path or destination Supports up to 3 Alternate Destination Profiles which must be specified if the B channel is used for the backup link Although multiple call profiles are supported once backup is in progress on a B channel all data is transmitted to the same destination until backup is terminated on that B channel and another destination specified Incorporates conges
43. A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Interfaces Group The Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 1573 consists of an object indicating the number of interfaces supported by the FrameSaver access unit and an interface table containing an entry for each interface Since RFC 1573 is an SNMPv2 MIB it is converted to SNMPv1 for support by the FrameSaver access unit The following table provides clarification for objects contained in the Interfaces group when it is not clear how the object definition in RFC 1573 is supported by the FrameSaver access unit Object Description Setting Contents ifNumber Specifies the number of Interfaces included DDS network interfaces 1 rows interfaces for this frame relay links synchronous data access unit in the ifTable ports BRI bearer channel and COM port iflndex Provides the index to the Indexes and values ifEntry 1 interface table ifTable and m 1 COM port 2 ISDN BRI DBM When an unsupported index g is entered e g 2 B Channel 1 noSuchName is returned 3 Reserved to other tables as well m 4 DDS network interface m 5 Reserved m 6 Data Port 1 7 Data Port 2 m 8 Frame relay logical link sublayer network interface m 9 Frame relay logical link sublayer Port 1 interface m 10 Frame relay logical link sublayer Port 2 interface m 1 Frame relay logical link sublayer ISDN BRI DBM B Channel 1 9621 A2 GH30
44. Alarm Enable Disable No Signal Alarm Enable Disable Out of Service Alarm Enable Disable Out of Frame Alarm Enable Disable Excessive BPV Alarm Enable Disable B 2 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Port Physical Options Worksheet 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Worksheets Use this worksheet to record each port s physical configuration option settings Main Menu gt Configuration Ports gt Port 1 Port 2 Physical Device Name Refer to Port Options Table 4 1 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Port 1 Port 1 Enable Disable Port Type EIA 232 V 35 Port Rate Kbps with V 35 amp Compression enabled 4 8 9 6 14 4 16 8 19 2 24 28 8 38 4 48 56 and 64 kbps plus 128 192 and 256 kbps Transmit Clock Source Internal External Invert Transmit Clock Enable Disable Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Local Disable Control Leads Supported Force DTR RTS Both Port 2 Port 2 Enable Disable Port Type EIA 232 V 35 Port Rate Kbps with V 35 amp Compression enabled 4 8 9 6 14 4 16 8 19 2 24 28 8 38 4 48 56 and 64 kbps plus 128 192 and 256 kbps Transmit Clock Source Internal External Invert Transmit Clock Enable Disable Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Local Disable Control Leads Supported Force DTR RTS Both August
45. Asynchronous Synchronous Default Setting Asynchronous Specifies whether the port transmits synchronous or asynchronous data when it has been configured as the network communication link Port Use set to Net Link Asynchronous communication is assumed when Port Use is set to Terminal or Alarm Asynchronous The port uses asynchronous communication Synchronous The port uses synchronous communication Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second Data Rate Kbps does not appear if Port Type is set to Synchronous and Clock is set to External 9 6 Sets the COM port rate to 9600 bps 14 4 Sets the COM port rate to 14 400 bps 19 2 Sets the COM port rate to 19 200 bps 28 8 Sets the COM port rate to 28 800 bps 38 4 Sets the COM port rate to 38 400 bps RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices None No routing is used Use this configuration option when the device connected to the COM port is not a 9000 Series or 31 xx Series device Proprietary A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information between devices to enable routing of IP traffic Use this configuration option when the access unit is connected
46. August 1997 4 1 Setting Up Decide how you want to manage the unit and choose a management configuration Locally through a PVC between the FrameSaver access unit anda router attached to the DTE port Locally through a direct connection to the user interface via an asynchronous terminal Remotely using dedicated or multiplexed PVCs for in band management Remotely from a remote terminal via a modem or Telnet connection Remotely through an SNMP NMS routers or Internet devices If managing the FrameSaver access unit using an SNMP NMS or Telnet select an IP addressing scheme Refer to Chapter 2 Management Control and IP Addressing for sample IP addressing schemes Selecting a Management Interface Select one of the following management interfaces Asynchronous terminal user interface Over the FrameSaver access unit s COM port for local configuration and control when the system does not include an NMS An asynchronous terminal is also required for initial setup to enable external management Telnet access to the user interface Over the FrameSaver access unit s COM port or through an in band management channel PVC SNMP Over the FrameSaver access unit s COM port using a modem or LAN adapter or over the network interface or one of the DTE ports for in band management channels using PVCs Minimal Remote Configuration At a minimum the following configuration options must be set
47. BRI B2 Frame Relay Link Status gt Enable This causes the Destination contained in the first enabled ISDN Call Profile to be called and LMI to be established no DLCls will be established but LMI messages will be exchanged August 1997 4 7 Setting Up Menu Sequences 6 of 6 Steps for Setup Menu Selection Sequence 20 Verify connections cont d For an ISDN BRI DBM To verify the connection itinstailed 4 View the DBM Interface Status screen Line Status should show Active Operating Mode for the B channel should be Active and the Active Call Profile should show the Destination taken from the ISDN Call Profile Main Menu gt Status DBM Interface Status or the B channel s Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics gt BRI B1 Frame Relay Check Health and Status messages You should not see LMI Down for the interface Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status If you go to the unit s faceplate the BKP Backup LED should not be lit because no data is being passed 5 Return to Step 1 and disable the verified Destination 6 Enable the next Destination to be tested and repeat the procedure until all connections have been verified 7 When all connections have been verified re enable all destination profiles 4 8 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Logins Refer to Chapter 6 Security and Logins t
48. Clear Clears Community Name 1 Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the access unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 4 70 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 15 General SNMP Management Options 2 of 2 Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Re
49. DLCI EDLCI Profile Altemate Destination Link DLCI EDLC Profile User Interface Options Communication Port External Device COM Port Telnet and FTP Sessions Status Test Configuration Configuration Shortcuts Control 9621 A2 GH30 00 COM Port Call Setup COM Port Call Directories ISDN Call Profiles Device Name Management and Communication Options Communication Protocol Management PVCs General SNP Manangement SNVP NMS Security SNVP Traps Display Newor Modify Management PVC Display Management PVC Entry Administer Logins e Login ID Password Access Level Login Entry August 1997 497 15590b A 3 Configuration Worksheets Recording Configurations It is recommended that you keep a record of each FrameSaver access unit s configuration using the configuration worksheets provided in this appendix Menu selection sequences are also provided so you can go to the appropriate screens quickly B gt Procedure 1 Print out or copy the worksheets included in this appendix Make as many copies of each worksheet as needed 2 Record the access unit s Device Name on each page 3 Circle the interface being configured Port 1 Port 2 Network or the ISDN BRI DBM if installed 4 Write in or circle the settings for each configuration option Do this for each of the alternate configurations stored in Customer Configuration 1 and 2 as well Sto
50. DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI clears Primary EDLCI 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Primary Profile Possible Settings ASCII text Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary ISDN profile that is associated with the remote access unit Those ISDN profile IDs that you defined using Main Menu Control gt ISDN Call Profiles will be available for selection Profiles are identified by number This configuration option only appears when Destination Link is set to BRI and an ISDN Call Profile has been defined Alternate Link Possible Settings Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLC or DLC with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Network Specifies the Network NET interface as the alternate interface Port 1 or Port 2 Specifies the port as the alternate interface BRI B1 Specifies the ISDN B channel 1 as the alternate interface Clear Clears the source destination link and the DLCI field and suppresses the source destination EDLCI field Alternate DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate DLCI number used for the management PVC once the f
51. Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity August 1997 4 59 Setting Up Table 4 11 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 2 Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 5 Determines the amount of keyboard inactive time before disconnecting a user session Disconnect Time Minutes does not appear if Inactivity Timeout is set to Disable NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the access unit responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session Must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the access unit and an FTP client Disable Does not allow an FTP session FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for an async terminal interface session Enable User is prompted for a user ID and password Disable User is not prompted for a user ID and password 4 60 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Configuring Alarms Select Alarm from the Co
52. EDLCI definition Destination management using circuit multiplexing Source August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 EIA definition EIA 232 Port EIA 232E port connector interface Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCl EMI warnings B encapsulated GL 3 entering configurations B 2 Identity information Enterprise MIB 1 8 C 35 GL 3 Specific Traps equipment list Error Event LMI Group MIB C 21 Escape Sequence 4 56 Excess Burst Size Bits 4 45 Excessive BPV Alarm 4 33 External Clock Device COM Port options 4 55 Commands configuring controlling access 6 4 DTE loopback modem using for backup network loopback 5 31 Transmit Clock 4 26 F faceplate factory default configuration options resetting failure alarm connection 4 29 FCC definition GL 3 features FECN seinen ers FEP definition file transfer 5 37 FTP file transfer protocol 4 60 Session Flow Control 4 30 determining a method 9621 A2 GH30 00 Index FR Discovery definition fractional T1 compression unit 8 3 FRAD definition GL 4 frame GL 4 Frame Relay aggregation and aware configuration worksheets B 6 DDS access to frame relay application discovery DTE MIB MIB descriptions C 16 header mode re a port aggregation circuit multiplexing application protocol DTE Type PVC MIBs service MIB switching switching application tro
53. LEDs The faceplate has twelve LEDs Light Emitting Diodes that provide status on the m Access unit Network interface m DTE interface Refer to LEDs in Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting of the User s Guide to interpret the LEDs You can view LED information on the following screens m Display LEDs Control Viewing Alarms and LEDs via the User Interface View alarm and status change messages on the following async terminal interface screens System and Test Status screen using the following menu sequence Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status View To Health and Status Monitor the current status of the access unit Information appears in the order of its importance highest priority to lowest Self Test Results Get the results of a power up self test or a reset of the access unit Includes a central processing unit CPU test limited random access memory RAM test and a device test on each card the NAM and DBM if installed Test Status See which tests are currently active on this unit m Display LEDs screen using the following menu sequence Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs Select To Display LEDs Monitor the same conditions monitored by the front panel LEDs using the user interface instead 5 2 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Selecting which Port s Status is Shown by the
54. LEDs Using the Control screen you can assign which port s status appears on the front panel s LEDs There are 12 LEDs on the FrameSaver access unit s faceplate Refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting of the FrameSaver 9620 User s Guide to understand what they indicate To view LED information via the user interface see Viewing Alarms and LEDs via the User Interface page 5 2 B gt Procedure To select which port s status appears on the LEDs follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Control gt Select LEDs gt Port 1 Port 2 The port change is immediate the Save function is not required Alarms The FrameSaver access unit monitors alarm conditions occurring on the Network interface Data ports m Frame relay LMIs m Frame relay DLCls Viewing Alarm Messages You can view alarm messages via the Health and Status screen m Messages on Line 24 of the user interface screen m Printout from your ASCII terminal printer Refer to Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting of the FrameSaver 9620 User s Guide for more information on alarms 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Automatic Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs You can control whether generated alarm messages will initiate a call if a connection on the COM port external device has not already been established To dial out when an alarm occurs you must Connect an external modem to the COM port Select t
55. Link iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 devPVCTestType Enterprise MIB frCircuitDlci Frame Relay DTEs MIB enterpriseTest Start Any of the following tests are active on the DLCI PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern enterpriseTest Stop No longer any tests running on the port August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Each virtual circuit on a link that supports the Service Side of the frame relay UNI is represented by an entry in the PVC End Point Table of the Frame Relay Service MIB supported by the enterprise specific Frame Relay Service MIB All virtual circuits for the frame relay link share the same entry in the MIB Il Interfaces table that is they share the same iflndex The interface that supports these traps and conditions include the following Interface enterpriseDLCInetDown Up Variable Bindings Possible Cause Service Side of the Frame Relay Link iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 frPVCEndptDLCllndex RFC 1604 frPVCEndptRevdSigStatus RFC 1604 enterpriseDLCInetDown in service side DLCI Status is set to Inactive The compression connection if compression is enabled fails enterpriseDLCInetUp in service side DLCI Status is set to active The comp
56. Maintenance Resetting or Clearing Performance Statistics 9621 A2 GH30 00 You can clear all performance statistics or clear statistics for a selected interface using the Clear Statistics menu For DDS network physical statistics only user statistics can be cleared Telco statistics cannot be cleared NOTE You can also use the ClrStats function at the bottom of Performance Statistics screens to clear only the statistics shown on that screen Compression statistics cannot be cleared from the NMS gt Procedure To clear performance statistics from the Clear Statistics menu 1 Use the following menu sequence Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Clear Statistics 2 Select All or the interface Network Port 1 Port 2 or BRI for which you want performance statistics cleared If All is selected from the Clear Statistics menu all interface statistics are cleared no additional Clear Statistics menu for the selected interface appears If an interface is selected the statistics associated with that interface appear 3 Select All or a specific set of statistics Physical Frame Relay Link Frame Relay Error Frame Relay LMI or DLCI for which you want performance statistics cleared If All is selected from the Clear Interface Statistics menu all statistics for the selected interface are cleared If a specific set of statistics statistics register is selected only the selected statistics register is
57. Perform a put of Rxxyyzz ctl to the nam1_ctl ocd file to start the download If the control file is valid the message nam1_ctl ocd File Transfer Complete displays the write permission will be set on the nam2_low ocd the FTP connection will be closed and the device will reset and enter Minimum mode OK LED will be flashing Re establish an FTP session to the device Type bin to enter binary mode Type cd system to change to the system directory Perform a put of Rxxyyzza ocd to the nam2_low ocd file to start the download If a valid nam2_low ocd that is it has the same revision level as nam1_ctl ocd is successfully put and has the proper checksum then the message nam2_low ocd File Transfer Complete displays the file is loaded into system memory the write permission will be set on the nam3_hi ocd the system performs a memory bank switch the FTP connection will be closed a reset reinitialization occurs and the system will stay in Minimum mode Re establish an FTP session to the device Type bin to enter binary mode August 1997 5 39 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 11 Type cd system to change to the system directory 12 Perform a put of Rxxyyzzb ocd to the nam3_hi ocd file to start the download If a valid nam3_hi ocd that is it has the same revision level as the nam1_ctl ocd and nam2_low ocd files is successfully put and has the proper checksum then the message nam3_hi ocd File Transfer Complete displays the
58. Status Active Inactive BRI DLCI Type Standard Multiplexed CIR bps 0 64 000 56000 for BRI 64000 for other interfaces Excess Burst Size Bits 0 999 999 0 DLCI Priority Low Medium High DLCI Compression 1 Enable Disable DLCI Compression Ratio 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 0 1 Alarm Threshold 1 Port 1 DLCI Number 16 1007 Port 2 Network DLCI Status Active Inactive BRI DLCI Type Standard Multiplexed CIR bps 0 64 000 56000 for BRI 64000 for other interfaces Excess Burst Size Bits 0 999 999 0 DLCI Priority Low Medium High DLCI Compression 1 Enable Disable DLCI Compression Ratio Alarm Threshold 1 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 4 0 1 1 Available on Port 1 only 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 Configuration Worksheets PVC Connection Table Configuration Worksheet Recording PVC connections is not necessary when using the configuration shortcuts FR Discovery feature which automatically configures these records Each ID item in the worksheet includes the Source Link DLCI EDLCI and ISDN Call Profile as well as the Primary and Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI and ISDN Call Profile Use this worksheet to record up to 80 PVC connections Print or photocopy this page as many times as needed Main Menu gt Configuration PVC Connections New or Modify Device Name Refer to PVC Connections Options Table 4 7 Field
59. Telnet Session The Telnet Session Options screen appears 4 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet Telnet Session to Disable Require a user ID or password Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined Refer to Creating a Login on page 6 9 Assign an access level fora user ID Session Access Level to a level 1 2 or 3 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save changes select Save and press Return 7 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 6 3 Security and Logins Backup Security The FrameSaver access unit equipped with an ISDN BRI DBM uses call screening to avoid accidental or intentional disruption of network traffic The answering internal ISDN BRI DBM only accepts calls from valid calling identifiers Additional security includes m Internal ISDN BRI DBM When installed and enabled the ISDN BRI DBM takes advantage of ISDN services for network backup and Calling Number Identification Service CNIS to provide backup security ISDN assures the integrity of calling party identifiers and the DBM u
60. You cannot put a file to the factory cfg file under the system directory m You can only puta NAM or DBM program file nam1_ctl ocd nam2_low ocd nam3_hi ocd or dbmprog ocd into an access unit Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in Binary mode You cannot upload a NAM or DBM program file from an access unit August 1997 5 37 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 5 38 B gt Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a Unix host type ftp followed by the IP address of the access unit If a login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter 6 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them here The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory The following are available in the system memory directory nam1_ctl ocd nam2_low ocd nam3_hi ocd current cfg factory cfg cust1 cfg cust cfg and dbmprog ocd Use the standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change the current directory on the access unit to directory dir directory Print a a listing of the directory contents in the directory directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the access unit node to the lo
61. a LOBBY g LAN Adapter 135 18 3 2 l I COM Port 7 l Frame IP Address 135 18 40 3 l ii Relay 135 18 3 3 1 C S _1195 18 2 1 l Subnet 135 18 3 0 135 18 4 1 Subnet 135 18 4 0 Physical Connection PVC Connection This subnet connection can be to any of the following e SNMP NMS via the COM Port e LAN adapter via the COM Port e Frame relay RFC 1490 IP router via the DTE Port Frame relay non RFC router via AUX port to COM port e Terminal server via the COM Port 497 14913 01 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 2 11 Management Control and IP Addressing Routing to Remote Access Units Using Routers In the following examples the access unit at the central site is connected to A router instead of a LAN connection m The router is connected to the NMS The router s additional serial or AUX port connection is not used for management No additional network PVCs are required In the following examples data is not routed by the access units and management PVCs are not configured between them Instead management data for the remote access units is routed through the routers with management PVCs configured between the routers and access units Connection is via the existing DTE cable between the router s DTE interface and the access unit The illustration below shows all access units on the same subnet and all routers on the same subnet bal FR Router 135 18 2 2 FR Router 135 18 1 1
62. and originating BRI B channel Use this setting when a user side device is connected to the interface None LMI does not exist and is not expected None is not available for Network August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 5 Frame Relay Options 3 of 5 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting Annex D Specifies whether the LMI is supported on the frame relay interface and if supported which protocol is used LMI Protocol does not appear if LMI Personality for Port 1 or Port 2 is set to Network Side because LMI Protocol is discovered automatically Compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous CAUTION For the network interface if Annex D is not being used LMI Protocol must be changed before any FR Discovery automatic configuration takes place This option must be configured correctly for FR Discovery automatic determination and configuration to take place Before deployment of access units where Annex D is not used it is recommended that LMI Protocol be pre configured along with the Node IP Address Subnet Mask and DSO allocations Standard Supports Standard LMI on the frame relay interface Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Settin
63. and phone number for the enabled B channel Saving your entries is not necessary at this point Refer to Table 4 4 ISDN BRI DBM Options page 4 32 for additional configuration information Helpful Hint Tab from field to field rather than pressing Enter to avoid clearing information just entered Like the Enter key the Tab key advances the cursor to the next field August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Enter DLCI Records for the B Channel B gt Procedure 1 Select DLCI Records for the ISDN BRI B channel Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN BRI DBM gt DLC Records 2 Select New to create a DLCI record for the B channel The cursor is already in the function key area of the screen so you do not have to press Ctrl a 3 Enter the DLC number indicated on the DLC Records Configuration Worksheet to create the DLC Records 4 Press Cirl a to go to the function key area of the screen when finished creating DLCls and Save Refer to Table 4 6 DLC Record Options page 4 42 for configuration information Set Up Frame Relay for the B Channel B gt Procedure 1 Select BRI B1 Frame Relay Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN BRI DBM gt BRI B1 Frame Relay Set the B channel s LMI Personality to either User Side or Network Side Remember if the one ISDN BRI DBM is configured as the user side the DBM at the other end must be configured as the network side If configured to originate backup enter
64. and write access SNMP Get and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 4 72 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up for SNMP Traps 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Select SNMP Traps to display add or change the SNMP trap configuration options for the FrameSaver access unit Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps To configure the FrameSaver access unit for SNMP traps you must set The number of SNMP managers that are to receive SNMP traps from the FrameSaver access unit An IP address for each SNMP manager specified The type of SNMP traps to be sent from the FrameSaver access unit Use the SNMP Trap Options screen to configure the necessary configuration options needed to support the SNMP traps Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate see Table 4 17 NOTE Be sure to choose an operational link for the default Should the default link become disabled unrouteable traps will be discarded To Set the configuration option Enable sending of SNMP trap SNMP Traps to Enable messages Specify the number of SNMP managers that will receive SNMP trap messages from the access unit Number of SNMP Managers to the desired number maximum of 6 of SNMP managers to receive SNMP traps Specify an IP address for each SNMP manager specified in the Number of SNMP Managers
65. before deploying a a FrameSaver access unit to a remote site 4 2 Configure the Node IP Address and Node Subnet Mask see Management and Communication configuration options Communication Protocol page 4 63 Enable SNMP Management see Management and Communication configuration options General SNMP Management page 4 70 Enable Telnet Session see Telnet and FTP Session configuration options page 4 59 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Recommended Order for Setup 9621 A2 GH30 00 Before starting it is recommended that you print and or copy the configuration worksheets that are provided in Appendix B and review the factory set default options ahead of time Reviewing and completing the configuration worksheets before you start configuring the unit will soeed setup time The worksheets show the options that can be configured with their factory set default options in boldface type and in brackets If a setting needs to be changed you can mark the changes in one of two ways Circle or write in only the setting that needs to be changed from the default setting Circle or write in the setting for each configuration option To help you get started the following sequence of activities is recommended when setting up for operation Use the menu sequences shown to access the appropriate branch of the menu as needed Menu Sequences 1 of 6 Steps for Setup Menu Selection Sequence 1 Set up an async
66. configuration option NMS n IP Address to the IP address that identifies each SNMP manager s indicated in the Number of SNMP Managers configuration option Specify the network destination for the Trap Manager Destination to one of the following Default COM PVCname Select the type of SNMP trap messages to be sent from the access unit General Traps to enable or disable warmStart and authenticationFailure traps Enterprise Specific Traps to enable or disable enterpriseSpecific traps Link Traps to enable or disable linkDown and linkUp traps DLCI Traps Interfaces to specify which interfaces will generate linkDown linkUp and enterpriseSpecific traps August 1997 4 73 Setting Up Table 4 17 SNMP Traps Options 1 of 3 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the access unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the access unit An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive NMS n IP Address Possible Settings
67. data link The data links may or may not be connected to the same network This function references the SNMP management function used by access units with multiple interfaces and potentially multiple IP node addresses All access units will know about other access units that share PVCs and or DLCls through a form of RIP The access unit directs traffic based on DLC and EDLCI switching not through network protocol addresses FRAD router functions The access unit only reads the frame relay header not the data portion of the frame relay packet A method for interleaving several access channels onto a single circuit for transmission over the network Network Access Module It is a type of CCA that accesses or interfaces with the network Network Management System A computer system used for monitoring and controlling network devices A non latching loopback can only be initiated or terminated by the 56 kbps network service provider Out Of Frame An error condition in which frame synchronization bits are in error Out of Service A digital network trouble signal A group of control header and data characters data and control signals that are switched as a group within a communications network Packet Assembly and Disassembly The term PAD is used extensively in X 25 networks however it can apply to any packet switched network such as frame relay Allows two ports to share a single frame relay link Point to Point Protocol A lin
68. file is loaded into system memory the write permission will be removed for both the nam2_low ocd and the nam3_hi ocd files the system performs a reset reinitialization and the system will be in Normal mode and operating from the new program load The download has successfully completed Performing a DBM Upgrade 5 40 B gt Procedure To perform a DBM upgrade 1 2 3 4 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary mode Type cd dbm to change to the dbm directory Perform a put of Rxxyyzza ocd to the dbmprog ocd file to start the upgrade If the file is Then the message Successfully put and has dbmprog ocd File Transfer Complete displays the proper checksum The download has successfully completed Not successfully put due to dbmprog ocd File Transfer Failed displays You a bad file an invalid file or must now download another dbmprog ocd file to the the wrong checksum DBM for it to become operational August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins Introduction This chapter discusses the various methods of providing access security and tells you how to set each up followed by instructions for logging in or out once security has been set up Backup security is also discussed Limiting Access The FrameSaver access unit provides several methods of security by limiting user access through the following user interfaces m Direct Async Te
69. glows in response to the presence of a certain condition e g ALM on the front panel for an alarm condition Local Loopback An EIA lead standard for V 24 circuit LL ITU 141 an input signal DTE to DCE Local Management Interface The standard set of procedures and messages that manage PVCs the route between two DTEs It is a common standard for link management signaling information exchange Used to test various portions of a data link in order to isolate an equipment or data line problem A diagnostic procedure that sends a test message back to its origination point August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 LSD mesh network MIB multi homed host multiplexing NAM NMS non latching loopback OOF OOS packet PAD port aggregation PPP primary destination protocol PSTN PVC receiver RFC 1490 compliant RIP 9621 A2 GH30 00 Glossary Line Signal Detect An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit CF ITU 109 an output signal DCE to DTE A network configuration where each node has a path to every other node Management Information Base The set of variables a gateway running SNMP maintains Standard minimal MIBs have been defined and vendors often have private enterprise MIBs In theory any SNMP manager can talk to any SNMP agent with a properly defined MIB MIB II refers to an extended management database that contains variables not shared by SNMP A computer connected to more than one physical
70. indicator or bit Outbound frames may encounter congestion and be dropped Faceplate LED and rear panel label for the access unit s Backup interface Bipolar Violation A modified bipolar signaling method in which a control code is inserted into the original data format Basic Rate Interface An ISDN service rate of 144 Kbps provided as two B channels of 64 Kbps for information transfer and one D channel of 16 Kbps for control and signaling Cluster Controller A device that handles remote communications for multiple async or other VT100 compatible terminals or workstations Circuit Card Assembly A printed circuit board to which separate components are attached August 1997 GL 1 Glossary CCITT CD channel CIR circuit multiplexing CNIS COM port compression configuration option configuration shortcuts CPE CRC CSA CSU CTS data compression DBM DCE D channel GL 2 Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony currently known as the International Telecommunication Union ITU See ITU Carrier Detect A signal indicating that energy exists on the transmission circuit Associated with Pin 8 on an EIA 232 interface An independent data path Committed Information Rate Less than or equal to the access rate the CIR is used by the service provider for rate enforcement when the network is congested When rates exceed the CIR frames may be discarded The management pa
71. interface on a per DLCI basis Main Menu gt Test gt Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 PVC Tests gt Send Pattern If the selected DLCI is Then the Send Pattern test is Standard Disruptive Proprietary multiplexed Nondisruptive August 1997 5 29 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Monitor Pattern This test monitors packets for the 55 hexadecimal test pattern and checks sequence numbers using a proprietary method To view the test results see the PVC Tests Network Port 1 Port 2 or BRI B1 DLCI screen Main Menu gt Test gt Network Port 1 Port 2 or BRI B1 PVC Tests gt Monitor Pattern The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver access unit is in sync An Out of Syne message appears when 5 packets out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in the fields Connectivity Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver access unit node at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs Main Menu gt Test gt Network Port 1 Port 2 or BRI B1 PVC Tests gt Connectivity Selecting Connectivity sends a packet to the FrameSaver access unit at the other end of the PVC A response received within 5 seconds indicates that the access
72. is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named Tpa as defined by the Name configuration option see Table 4 14 you would select the PVC name Tpa NOTE Ifthe link or network destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 9 PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in Tampa Tpa can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local access unit and the one located in Tampa Tpa would appear as one of the available selections COMMUNICATION COM PORT IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting
73. is changed to Page 2 of 3 6 10 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Menu Hierarchy Menus The following menu structure gives you a graphical representation of how the user interface menus or screens are organized 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 A 1 Menu Hierarchy Status Test Configuration Configuration Shortcuts Control System and Interface LMI i Display LEDs Performance Test Status Reported BRI B1 Statistics Health and DLCls Operating Mode Network DLC Active Call Profile t Physical Last Cause Value 7 Frane Relay Remote Call ID Clear Statistics Negotiated Rate Se Portn or DBM lt Port n or BRI B1 Link Errors and LMI Clear Statistics All Network Port 1 Port2 BRI PVC Tests Interface Physical Tests Interface DLCI Test Command Status and Result CSU Loopback Network only DSU Loopback Network only DTE Extemal Loopback Ports only e Send511 e Monitor 511 497 15590a August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Edit Display Ports for Interface Physical Options Compression Options Port 1 only Frane Relay Options DLC Records Auto Configuration Shortcuts Config Template FR Discovery Network ISDN DBM PVC Connections Menu Hierarchy PVC Connection Table Entry Source Link DLCI EDLCI Profile Primary Destination Link
74. number of status enquiry messages received in LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 before declaring an LMI Errored Event and the time interval in seconds that the Local Management Interface s network side uses Applies only when LMI Type is set to Standard and LMI Personality is set to Network Side of the UNI LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 does not appear if LMI Personality is set to User Side or None Compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 4 40 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 5 Frame Relay Options 5 of 5 LMI Link Status Change Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated if the LMI link goes down or out of service LMI Link Status Change Alarm does not appear if LMI Personality is set to None Compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous The interface is an ISDN BRI DBM and the DBM is configured for Answer see Table 4 4 Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message if the LMI goes down Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message if the LMI goes down DLCI Status Change Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Generates a DLCI link status change alarm message if the network sends a message indicating a status change for a DLCI The network reports the sta
75. off or Entry 4 off to on August 1997 C 33 MIB Descriptions Output Signal Table C 34 The Output Signal Table contains entries for the output signals that can be asserted by the FrameSaver access unit for each of the synchronous data ports Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSaver access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents rs232O0utSigName Contains the ID of a Supports only the following values E hardware output signal cts 2 Clear To Send dsr 3 Data Set Ready rs232OutSigState Contains the current signal Supports only the following values 232 j j os oo stare m on 2 The signal is asserted off 3 The signal is deasserted rs232OutSig Indicates the number of Not supported Changes times that a signal has rs232OutSig changed from on to off or Entry 4 off to on August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Enterprise MIB 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions The following lists the enterprise specific MIB objects supported by the unit Device Configuration MIB Port Usage Table DDS Interface Specific Definitions Device Security Table Device Traps Table Device Control Object Device Health and Status Object Frame Relay PVC Cross Connect Table Frame Relay PVC Test Group Frame Relay Clear Statistics Group Frame Relay Extension Group Data Compression Group IP Route Table August 1997 C 35
76. ois ate Eade bee a n ia 4 83 Modify the PVC Connection Being Backed Up 4 84 Set Up Automatic BackUp ccreerererisrdrenreni iseasi e iaaa 4 85 Configure the Other End of the Circuit 0 2 00 ee 4 85 Verify the ISDN BRI DBM Setup 0 2002s 4 86 August 1997 iii Contents 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance What Are the Troubleshooting and Maintenance Features 5 1 m How Do Know There Isa Problem 00 seers 5 1 E LEDE aiii eee es Sn eee eee ee searing 5 2 Viewing Alarms and LEDs via the User Interface 5 2 Selecting which Port s Status is Shown by the LEDs 5 3 Ge np kere an ekee wee ne ae eae ee he ee eee ee te 5 3 Viewing Alarm Messages c cece e eee tenet eee eee 5 3 Automatic Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs 0005 5 4 Manual Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs 22200005 5 5 E Supported SNMP Trapik vcd dead veh Qh nia bine La aa ede 5 5 Selecting SNMP Traps o ionini ieee seii Aho dee we Ei ea eee ed 5 6 Dialing Out and Sending SNMP Traps 2 0eeeeeeee 5 6 Maintaining COM Port Directories and ISDN Call Profiles 5 7 Displaying or Changing COM Port Directory Numbers 5 8 Creating Displaying or Changing ISDN Call Profiles 5 9 E Manual Dial BACKUP recane iai odewatia oente ween Sontews 5 10 Forcing Backup Manually 2000 cee eee eee eens
77. one configuration area to be copied into another configuration area COM Port Supported Link Layer Protocols The access unit supports two link layer protocols for connection to an external SNMP manager or network device via the COM port m Point to Point Protocol PPP Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP 1 8 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 About Congestion Control As with any frame relay product network congestion can cause problems As long as there is little or no congestion in the network data is transferred at high speeds with little or no delay or errors The following indicates how the access unit can be configured to handle congestion control On the network side the access unit can be configured to monitor its own traffic and enforce the CIR m On the user side the access unit can be configured to monitor its own traffic and enforce the CIR CIR and Excess Burst Size are set for each DLCI on the PVC connection Based upon the network committed information rate and burst size the access unit s inbound or outbound CIR enforcement can be set to mark a frame for discard eligibility and forward or drop a frame Contact your network supplier for the CIR and Excess Burst Size they will provide Setting a port s Inbound CIR Enforcement Mode frames received from the frame relay interface and Outbound CIR Enforcement Mode frames sent over the frame relay interface enforces CIR and
78. one of the alternate directory telephone numbers 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory Directory Number A in the Control menu s COM Port Call Directories inclusive 4 62 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Configuring Management and Communication Options Select Management and Communication to display the Management and Communications Options menu The Management and Communication Options menu contains the following selections Communication Protocol Management PVCs General SNMP Management SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps Auto Backup Criteria Communication Protocol Select Communication Protocol to display add or change the information necessary to support the IP communication network see Table 4 13 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Protocol Table 4 13 Communication Protocol Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which you can view or edit The first digit i e 779 255 255 255 can be any num
79. only since deleteTCB 12 is not supported UDP Group The UDP Group objects are fully supported Transmission Group Objects in the Transmission Group are supported on the DDS network interface the synchronous data ports and the COM port These objects are not defined within MIB II but rather through other Internet standard MIB definitions The following table provides clarification for objects contained in the Transmission group when it is not clear how the object definition is supported by the access unit Object Description rs232 Supported on the synchronous data ports and on the COM transmission 33 port Defined by the RS 232 like MIB frame relay Supported on DTE side frame relay interfaces Defined by the transmission 32 Frame Relay DTEs MIB frameRelayService Supported on the Service side frame relay interfaces Defined transmission 44 by the Frame Relay Service MIB 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 C 15 MIB Descriptions SNMP Group The SNMP Group objects that apply to a management agent are fully supported The following objects apply only to an NMS and return a zero value if accessed m snmplnTooBig snmp 8 snmplnNoSuchNames snmp 9 m snmplnBadValues snmp 10 snmplinReadOnlys snmp 11 m snmplnGenErrs snmp 12 snmplnGetResponses snmp 18 snmplnTraps snmp 19 snmpOutGetRequests snmp 25 m snmpOutGetNexts snmp 26 m snmpOutSetRequests snmp 27 Frame Relay DTEs M
80. port Refer to Chapter 4 Displaying System Information in the User s Guide to interpret status messages For an external backup device to place a call manually Refer to Manual Dial Backup in Chapter 5 for additional information For an ISDN BRI DBM if installed Refer to Manual Dial Backup in Chapter 5 to verify dial backup operation when passing data Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status Health and Status column Disable a primary destination network DLCI on the data port connected to the external backup unit Do this for units at both ends of the circuit An alternate destination must have been specified Main Menu Configuration Data Ports gt Port 1 Port 2 gt DLC Records Modify gt DLCI Number DLCI Status Disable This procedure is for testing without passing data in order to verify connections 1 Disable all ISDN Call Profiles but the Destination to be tested or make sure the first ISDN Call Profile that is enabled is the one to be tested Main Menu gt Control ISDN Call Profiles 2 Verify that the B channel to be tested is enabled and its frame relay Link Status configuration option is set to Disable If not change the Link Status setting and save Main Menu Configuration ISDN BRI gt BRI B1 BRI B2 Frame Relay To test the connection 3 Enable frame relay Link Status for the B channel to be tested Main Menu Configuration ISDN BRI gt BRI B1
81. provides digital communication circuits Discard Eligibility Part of the frame header that marks a frame for low priority if there is congestion on the network If congestion occurs DE frames are the first to be discarded by the network With a unit equipped with the data compression feature compressed data coming from the network is routed de compressed then re serialized for the DTE port Data Link Connection Identifier The virtual circuit number corresponding to a particular connection between two destinations This number is used as part of the frame relay header The DLCI is always between devices not just between endpoint devices The total number of DLCls between endpoints make up the PVC DLCls are a local means of identifying a PVC Canadian Department of Communication Data Set or DCE Ready An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit CC ITU 107 an output signal DCE to DTE Data Service Unit Data communications equipment that provides an interface between the DTE and the digital network Data Terminal Equipment The equipment such as computers and printers that provides or creates data Data Terminal Ready An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit CD ITU 108 an input signal DTE to DCE Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier Use when multiplexing user data on a single DLCI comparable to having multiple DLCls on an interface being routed to a single DLCI on the network side EDLCls use a proprietary method to mu
82. selected is Then setup configuration is Multiplexed Management cont d 1MPort 1MPort Compr cont d Management PVCs 2 Name is automatically created from the network DLCI as Mgmnnnn nnnn being the discovered multiplexed network DLCI number 2 Example Network DLCI 1001 gt Port 1 DLCI 1001 and Mgm1001 IP Address is taken from the Node IP Address 2 Subnet Address is taken from the Node Subnet Address 2 Primary Destination Link is set to Network Primary Destination DLCI is automatically created from the network DLCI Two Primary Destination EDLCls are automatically created Port 1 data is always EDLC 0 Management data is always EDLCI 2 Set DE is set to Enable RIP is set to Proprietary PVC Connections Source Link is set to Port 1 Source DLCI is taken from the Port 1 DLCI Number Source EDLCI is blank Primary Destination Link is set to Network Primary Destination DLCI is taken from the network DLCI Number Two Primary Destination EDLCls are automatically created Port 1 data is always EDLCI 0 Management data is always EDLCI 2 Port 1 interface and management DLCls are automatically connected to the Network interface EDLCls 2 If the same DLCI EDLCI combination already exists no changes are made to the existing management PVC You may want to configure a unique Node IP Address and Subnet Ma
83. status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Inactivity Timeout does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 5 Determines the amount of lapsed time before disconnecting a user session in minutes Disconnect Time Minutes does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive 4 54 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Setting Up the COM Port to Support an External Device 9621 A2 GH30 00 Select External Device Com Port to display or change the configuration options that control call processing for an external device attached to the COM port see Table 4 10 Main Menu gt Configuration
84. terminal to Configure terminal to be compatible with the user access the user interface interface Speed or data rate set to 19 2 kbps Character length set to 8 Parity set to None Stop Bits set to 1 Flow Control set to None 2 Configure access to the Main Menu Configuration User Interface user interface ee Communication Port a External Device COM Port Telnet and FTP Sessions 3 Configure management Main Menu Configuration Management and communication Communication gt Communication Protocol gt Node IP Address minimally Node Subnet Mask minimally Management PVCs General SNMP Management a SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps 1 Not necessary if auto configuration is used and management access is through the frame relay network August 1997 4 3 Setting Up 4 4 Menu Sequences 2 of 6 Steps for Setup Menu Selection Sequence 4 If LMI provided by the Main Menu Configuration Network network provider is not ANSI Annex D configure LMI Protocol for the network interface Frame Relay LMI Protocol Standard or Annex A 5 Select a configuration Main Menu Configuration Shortcuts gt template so that only the Contig Template appropriate port options appear for configuration 1Port 1Port Compr 2Ports 2Ports Compr None default 6 Configure physical and frame relay options for each data port the network interface a
85. the DCE or externally by the DTE connected to the port NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the access unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal The DCE clocks transmitted data and uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE externally provides the clock for the transmitted data and uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data Do not use with compression unless the DTE can phase lock XTXC to TXC Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the clock supplied by the DCE on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to interchange circuit BA ITU 103 Transmitted Data TD Enable Phase inverts the DCE s TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the access unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the DCE s TXC clock August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 1 Port Options 3 of 3 Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the po
86. the Manual Link Profile as indicated on the Frame Relay Options Worksheet Set the B channel s Link Status to Auto 2 Modify other frame relay options as indicated on the Frame Relay Options Worksheet Refer to Table 4 5 Frame Relay Options page 4 37 for configuration information 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 81 Setting Up Set Up the ISDN Call Profiles B gt Procedure 1 Select ISDN Call Profiles Main Menu gt Control gt ISDN Call Profiles 2 Setup the ISDN Call Profile s Up to three profiles can be set up Change Status to Enable Enter aname for the destination e g Tampa Up to 8 characters can be entered Ifthe ISDN BRI DBM will be the originator enter only the Called ID the phone number for the DBM that will be called If the ISDN BRI DBM will be answering the backup call enter only the Calling ID for the DBM that will be calling 3 Press Cirl a when finished setting up the profile s and Save CAUTION You must Save Control menu changes before returning to the Main Menu or your entries will be lost 4 Reset the FrameSaver access unit to activate the SPID IDs Main Menu gt Control Reset Device Helpful Hint Remember to use the up arrow key T to move the cursor to the last selection on the Control menu 5 Enter Yes to the Are you sure prompt y and Enter The FrameSaver access unit reinitializes itself See Creating Displaying or Changing ISDN Call Profi
87. the following conditions No signal NS Out of service OOS Out of frame OOF Excessive bipolar violations BPVs A failure of the logical connection that will cause automatic backup to occur includes LMI failure T1 timer has expired a specified number of times LMI Heartbeat T1 is configured to monitor LMI DLCI failure Declared inactive by the frame relay network Automatic backup also allows an NMS to provide time of day backup control since the FrameSaver 9620 does not have an internal time of day clock for switching between automatic and non automatic backup cycles Refer to Restricting Auto Backup Based Upon the Time of Day in Chapter 4 for the procedure Being a frame relay aware product the access unit continually monitors the condition of the frame relay physical and logical links As soon as a failure is detected the access unit initiates a backup call provided the automatic backup feature is enabled establishes an alternate connection and switches data to the established backup link All reconfiguration occurs automatically within the unit entirely transparent to the connected DTE When the primary circuit recovers returning to normal service the access unit automatically restores data to the primary circuit Refer to Chapter 3 Typical Applications for additional information Chapter 4 Seiting Up provides assistance in configuring the access unit for backup 1 16 August
88. the following value frDicmiEntry 3 format used on the frame relay interface m q922 4 Indicates the address format specified by the final Q 922 standard frDIcmiAddressLen frDicmiEntry 4 Describes the address length used on the frame relay interface Supports only the following value two octets 2 Indicates the address length is two octets as specified by the final Q 922 standard LMI Parameters frDicmiEntry 5 to frDicmiEntry 8 Contains the protocol parameters that control the LMI link for the frame relay interface If an LMI is configured on the interface the objects will return the following configured values m frDicmiErrorPollinginterval frDicmiEntry 5 LMI Heartbeat T1 configuration option from 5 to 30 in increments of 5 m frDicmiFullEnquiryinterval frDicmiEntry 6 LMI Status Enquiry N1 configuration option m frDicmiErrorThreshold frDicmiEntry 7 LMI Error Event N2 configuration option m frDIicmiMonitoredEvents frDicmiEntry 8 LMI Clearing Events N3 configuration option August 1997 C 17 MIB Descriptions C 18 Object Description Setting Contents frDIcmiMax Contains the maximum Supported as read only for all frame SupportedVCs number of virtual circuits relay interfaces frDicmiEntry 9 allowed for this frame relay interface The maximum number of virtual circuits for all frame relay interfaces supported
89. the network interface is configured as the user side of LMI the most common configuration and FR Discovery is selected the FrameSaver access unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message Then it configures network and port interface DLCls and automatically creates a PVC Automatically configured network DLCls are multiplexed and all automatically configured port DLCls carry the same DLCI Number as the network DLCls These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the access unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network The Configuration Template and FR Discovery features can be used in conjunction with or independent of one another e g you can select a discovery mode without ever using a configuration template NOTE If using FR Discovery and the service provider does not use Annex D protocol it is recommended that the network interface s LMI Protocol be pre configured along with the Node IP Address Subnet Mask and DSO allocations before the deployment of remote FrameSaver access units Otherwise the feature will not work properly August 1997 4 13 Setting Up Selecting a Configuration Template Select Config Template to set up an application that reflects how the FrameSaver access unit will be used NOTE It is recommended that you do not change the application template used during initial setup For example if you used the 2Ports t
90. there is a failure of the Primary Destination Link or DLCI a f an ISDN BRI DBM B channel is the interface and the DBM is configured to originate a call the DBM dials the calling ID contained in the Alternate Destination Profile see PVC Connections Options Table 4 7 When the primary link is restored the access unit disconnects the call and data is switched back to the primary link f an ISDN BRI DBM B channel is the interface and the DBM is configured to answer a call the DBM waits for a call f adata port connected to an external device is the interface the external device originates and answers calls NOTE When an ISDN BRI DBM is installed the DBM becomes active whenever a Source DLCI or Primary Destination DLCI is configured on the link for an ISDN Call Profile Disable Frame relay is not in service Does not transmit or receive data packets on the interface the LMI is inactive f an ISDN BRI DBM B channel is the interface is configured to originate a call and frame relay Link Status is disabled the access unit terminates existing call s This can be used to manually disconnect the call f an ISDN BRI DBM B channel is the interface is configured to answer a call and the frame relay Link Status is disabled the access unit terminates existing call s and will not answer future calls on the B channel f a data port connected to an external device is the interface the external device terminates calls
91. to 5 times per alarm or SNMP trap message with a delay between each retry The delay is specified by the Dial Out Delay Time Min configuration option If an alternate dial out directory is specified see Alternate Dial Out Directory the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed after 5 tries then the alternate directory s telephone number is called see the Control menu s COM Port Call Directories Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Time Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an alarm or SNMP trap message is sent the wait between call attempts see Call Retry 1 10 Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts inclusive Alternate Dial Out Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer etc resulting from an attempt to send an alarm or SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number Attempts the call up to 5 times per alarm or SNMP trap message Up to 5 alternate call directories can be set up When Call Retry on Alarm or Trap is enabled the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed after 5 tries then the specified alternate directory s telephone number is called None Does not dial out using
92. to another 9000 Series or 31 xx Series device through the COM port Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link and Port Type is set to Asynchronous 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits You must use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 9 Communication Port Options 3 of 4 Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits in the character and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits in the character and its corresponding parity bit always odd Siop Bits Possible Settings 1 1 5 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 1 5 Pr
93. to provide access to additional tests such as loopbacks and pattern tests which are not provided for in the Interfaces Group of MIB II Object Description Setting Contents ifTestID iffestEntry 1 Provides a unique identifier for the current request of the interface s test Ensures that the results of the test are for that request in case a test is requested by another SNMP Manager before the results of the first test are received Set by an SNMP Manager before the test is started The access unit then increments the previous value The value is then checked after the test has completed iffestStatus iffestEntry 2 Indicates the test status of the interface m Set to inUse 2 by an SNMP Manager before a test is started Set to notInUse 1 by the access unit when the test has completed Also set to notInUse 1 by the access unit if the SNMP Manager fails to set an iffestType within 5 minutes iffestType iffestEntry 3 A control variable used to start stop user initiated tests on the interface Provides the following capabilities Start stop data port loopback Start stop test pattern on a data port Start stop monitor test on a data port The following objects use identifiers to control tests on the interface m noTest 0 Stops the test in progress on the interface m testLoopExternalDTE iffestType 2 Starts an External DTE loopback on the inter
94. two octets and the DLCI is 10 bits frLportVCSig Protocol frLportrEntry 6 Identifies the local in channel signaling protocol that is used for this frame relay interface The value corresponds to the LMI Protocol configuration option The values supported are m none 1 No LMI is supported on this interface m Imi 2 The standard LMI is supported on this interface ansiT1617D 3 The LMI supported on this interface complies with ANSI T1 617 Annex D m ccittQ933A 5 The LMI supported on this interface complies with CCITT Q 933 Annex A 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 C 23 MIB Descriptions Management VC Signaling Group The Management VC Signaling Group consists of the Frame Relay Management VC Signaling Table Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSaver access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents frMgtVCSigProced frMgtVCSig Entry 1 Identifies the local in channel signaling procedure used for this frame relay interface Supports only the following value m u2nnet 1 Only the user to network service side procedures are performed DTE Side LMI Parameters DTE side protocol parameters are not supported since this MIB is only supported for service side LMI The value of the following MIB objects is equal to NoSuchName m frMgtVCSigUserN391 frMgtVCSigEntry 2 m frM
95. unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 10 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column Physical Tests Physical Tests can be commanded from any of the following interfaces Network m Ports 1 and2 Physical tests require the participation of your network service provider CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment 5 30 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance CSU External Network Loopback CSU Loopback loops the received signal on the network interface back to the network This loopback is an external loopback that is located as close as possible to the network interface Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests CSU Loopback DTE DTE Aggregate DDS Port Interface eens ort FrameSaver Access Unit i apio CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the PVCs assigned to the network interface In addition IP data sent over the PVC will be disrupted while this test is active DSU Internal Network Loopback 9621 A2 GH30 00 DSU loopback loops the received signal on the network interface back to the network without affecting operation of other ports The signal is looped on the DTE side of the FrameSaver access unit This l
96. user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used is the same login used for an async terminal interface session Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the user interface via a Telnet session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified time of keyboard inactivity NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions Enable Terminates Telnet session after the specified time of inactivity
97. valid setting Network Specifies the Network interface as the source link Port 1 or Port 2 Specifies the port as the source link BRI B1 Specifies the ISDN B channel 1 as the source link Clear Clears the Source Link and Source DLCI settings and suppresses Source EDLCI 4 46 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 7 PVC Connections Options 2 of 4 Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Source EDLCI only appears if Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Source Profile Possible Settings ASCII text Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source ISDN profile associated with the remote unit Those ISDN profile IDs that you defined using Main Menu gt Control ISDN Call Profiles will be availabl
98. you want to view or make changes to and press Return 2 Select the configuration options applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 11 Setting Up Saving Configuration Options When all changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save configuration option changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 Configuration areas gt Procedure To save the configuration options changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 2 Select the Save function key from any of the Configuration menu screens and press Return The Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area where you want to save the changes to and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE If you changed configuration options and try to exit the Configuration menu without saving those changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response to saving the changes If you select Then the No Main Menu screen appears Changes are not saved Yes Save Configuration To scr
99. 0 00 Input Signal Table 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions PortEntry 14 Object Description Setting Contents rs232SyncPortldle Specifies the bit pattern This MIB object is not supported Pattern used to indicate an idle line since flags xFE are used as IDLE rs232Sync and the only choices in the MIB are PortEntry 13 mark and space rs232SyncPort Specifies the minimum Supports only the following value MinFlags number of flag patterns the m 2 The mini ber of fl rs232Sync port needs to recognize the SNe MINIMUM NUMDEr OF led end of one frame and the start of another supported for all ports on the access unit The Input Signal Table contains entries for the input signals that can be detected by the FrameSaver access unit for each of the synchronous data ports Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSaver access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents rs232InSigName rs232InSig Entry 2 Contains the ID of a hardware input signal Supports only the following values m rts 1 Request To Send dtr 4 Data Terminal Ready rs232InSigState Contains the current signal Supports only the following values cna state m on 2 The signal is asserted off 3 The signal is de asserted rs232InSig Indicates the number of Not supported Changes times that a signal has rs232InSig changed from on to
100. 00 Description Model Feature Number FrameSaver Access Units FrameSaver Access Unit with ISDN BRI DBM Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply COM Port to PC Cable Network Cable ISDN Cable V 35 DTE Adapter and Documentation 9620 A2 202 FrameSaver Access Unit without ISDN BRI DBM Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply COM Port to PC Cable Network Cable ISDN Cable V 35 DTE Adapter and Documentation 9620 A2 203 FrameSaver Access Unit with ISDN BRI DBM with Universal 80 220 Vac Power Supply Includes 1 Slot Housing COM Port to PC Cable Network Cable ISDN Cable V 35 DTE Adapter and Documentation 9620 A2 442 FrameSaver Access Unit without ISDN BRI DBM with Universal 80 220 Vac Power Supply Includes 1 Slot Housing COM Port to PC Cable Network Cable ISDN Cable V 35 DTE Adapter and Documentation 9620 A2 443 FrameSaver Network Access Module NAM 9621 B2 412 FrameSaver Access Unit R1 to R2 Upgrade Includes Software Diskettes Upgrade Instructions and current Documentation 9620 C2 412 Optional Features ISDN BRI Dial Backup Module DBM 9098 F 1 870 Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 891 User Documentation Manuals FrameSaver 9620 Access Unit Technical Reference Paper Manual 9000 M1 004 August 1997 G 1 Equipment List Description Model
101. 00 August 1997 C 3 MIB Descriptions C 4 Object Description Setting Contents ifDescr Supplies text about the Text Strings ifEntry 2 interface Interfaces Interfaces m DDS network COM port Data ports Port 1 and 2 m ISDN BRI DBM B channel Frame relay logical link sublayers m DTE side m Service side m Network DDS DDS FR DSU Hardware Version CCA number COM Port DDS FR DSU Hardware Version CCA number Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 Port n DDS FR NAM Hardware Version CCA number m ISDN BRI DBM B Channel 1 ISDN BRI DBM Hardware Version CCA number Frame relay logical link sublayers m Network DDS of FR DTE DDS FR DSU Hardware Version CCA number Data Port n of FR DTE Slot 1 Port n DDS FR DSU Hardware Version CCA number m ISDN BRI B Channel 1 of FR DTE DDS FR DSU Hardware Version CCA number m Network DDS of FR SERVICE DDS FR DSU Hardware Version CCA number Data Port n of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port n DDS FR DSU Hardware Version CCA number m ISDN BRI B Channel 1 of FR SERVICE ISDN BRI DBM Hardware Version CCA number August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Object Description Setting Contents ifType ifEntry 3 Identifies the interface type based on the physical link protocol s right below the network layer m Used for DDS network m Used for BRI channels
102. 1 in Chapter 4 Setting Up Configuring an External Device Connected to the COM Port 2 4 The access unit can be managed remotely by connecting an external device like a modem or PAD packet assembly disassembly facility to the COM port Simple ASCII Interface Frame Async or o Relay VT100 L e Network Terminal 3 Telnet s Telnet Oe VT100 Emulation External Modem WAN Link and Telnet or NMS using SNMP 496 14964 Using this out of band example configure call processing using the following pertinent configuration options configured from the user interface Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface External Device COM Port External Device Commands Dial In Access Connect Prefix Port Usage See Table 4 10 in Chapter 4 Setting Up If connecting to an external device like a LAN adapter configure the Communication Port Link Protocol for PPP Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration User Interface Communication Port and Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication respectively August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Management Control and IP Addressing Configuring End to End Management Control When managing the access unit remotely you can establish a management link across the network in one of three ways You can m Use a dedicated DLCI or PVC m Use a shared PVC embedded DLCI m Use RFC 1490 routers for transparent ma
103. 1997 B 3 Configuration Worksheets Port 1 Compression Options Worksheet B 4 Use this worksheet to record Port 1 compression configuration option settings Main Menu gt Configuration Ports Port 1 Compression Device Name Refer to Port 1 Compression Configuration Option Table 4 2 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Compression Enable Disable DTE Type Frame Relay Bit Synchronous Compression Ratio Alarm Enable Disable Connection Failure Alarm 1 Enable Disable Flow Control 1 Clock CTS None Short Packet Bypass Enable Disable Optimize Based On Throughput Latency 1 Not shown when Compression is set to Disable August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Worksheets ISDN BRI DBM Options Worksheet If an ISDN BRI DBM is installed use this worksheet to record its physical configuration option settings Main Menu gt Configuration gt SDN BRI DBM Device Name Refer to ISDN BRI DBM Options Table 4 4 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold BRI B1 Enable Disable Originate or Answer Originate Answer Switch Type NI 1 Display only BRI B1 Service Profile ID SPID 3 20 digits BRI B1 Phone Number 7 digits BRI B1 Manual Link Profile 8 characters 1 Not shown when the B channel is set to Disable Use this worksheet to set up ISDN BRI D
104. 30 00 MIB Descriptions Device Security Table JD security D common 8 The Device Security Table devSecurity mib controls the number of SNMP Managers that may access the access unit as well as the access level read or read write This table is fully supported except for the new security manager table newSecurityMgrTable which is not supported Device Traps Table D traps D common 9 The Device Traps Table devTrapMgr mib manages the SNMP Managers to which the access unit reports traps This table is fully supported Device Control Object D control D common 10 The devControlReset devControl mib object resets the device using the devControlReset devControl mib object and performs a lamp test This object is fully supported Device Health and Status Object devStatus JD devStatus 1 The devStatus devHealthAndStatus mib object reports the FrameSaver access unit s health and status and self test result messages This object is fully supported Frame Relay PVC Cross Connect Table pycXconnect crossConnect 3 The Frame Relay PVC Cross Connect Table devPVCXconnect mib manages PVC connections Contains a list of DLCI EDLCI cross connections and their addresses Includes Alternate Destination information if configured This table is supported as read only Frame Relay PVC Test Group devPVCTest JDFrameRelay 3 The Frame Relay PVC Test Group devPVCtest mib is used to start and stop tests on DLCls a
105. 30 00 August 1997 4 35 Setting Up Configuring Frame Relay Options for Each Interface 4 36 Configure the frame relay configuration options for the following interfaces Data ports m Network ISDN BRI if installed Select Frame Relay from one of the interface screens Network Ports or BRI B1 to display or change the Frame Relay configuration options for the selected interface All interfaces ports are configured in the same manner Port 1 has been selected for this procedure B gt Procedure To configure interfaces to connect with the frame relay service 1 Configure Port 1 Frame Relay Options Main Menu Configuration Ports Port 1 column Frame Relay The frame relay link is already configured to be in service Link Status is set to Enable 2 Determine whether CIR enforcement should be changed see Table 4 5 The factory default settings Inbound CIR Enforcement Mode is None Outbound CIR Enforcement Mode is Forced 3 Based upon the information supplied by the service provider about the local management interface LMI and assigned line conditions set the rest of the Frame Relay configuration options see Table 4 5 4 Configure Port 2 Frame Relay Options referring to Steps 2 and 3 Main Menu Configuration Ports Port 2 column Frame Relay August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 5 Frame Relay Options 1 of 5 Link Status Possible Settings Enable Auto Disable Def
106. 4 31 rates DE definition GL 3 Set decompression GL 3 Default Network Destination 4 64 deleting a login Destination 4 74 Default Network Link Profile 4 49 determining test status results 5 36 device configuration variable C 36 MIBs dial backup ea Dial In Access dialing out SNMP Traps 5 6 Dial Out Alarm amp Trap Delay Time Min 4 62 Directory 4 62 Directory Alternate Dial Out displaying and changing numbers maintaining COM port disabling SNMP access 6 5 Discard Eligible DE a a Disconnect String Time Minutes displaying COM port directory numbers configuration opto Ee information how to ISDN call profiles 5 9 IN 4 DLCI Compression Ratio for Alarm Threshold configuring a management dedicated for management 2 5 definition Destination Number Priority Records configuration worksheet B 7 Source 4 47 Status 4 44 Status Change Alarm 4 41 Traps on Interfaces Type DLCMI group MIB DOC definition download capability downloading software 5 37 DSR definition GL 3 DSU definition GL 3 Latching Loopback Loopback DTE configuring port using a management DLCl definition GL 3 external loopback frame relay MIB descriptions C 16 MIB port initiated loopbacks 4 27 Type V 35 adapter cable DTR Control Leads Supported definition GL 3 Ignore Control Leads 4 53 E
107. 5 11 Manual Backup When There Is a Failure 22 0 5 13 m Managing the FrameSaver Access Unit 000 c eee ranna 5 14 Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit 000 eee cece ee 5 15 Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit from the Control Menu 5 15 Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit via Power Recycling 5 15 Resetting the Access Unit s COM Port or Factory Defaults 5 16 Resetting or Clearing Performance Statistics 0 eee 5 17 m Troubleshooting Problem Tables 0c cece cece eee eee eee 5 19 Access Unit Problems 2 22 4 uci cew she seated ernier ss 5 19 Data Compression Problems 0 ccc ccc e nee ne eee nnees 5 21 Frame Relay PVC Problems ccecccne eee ne eee nees 5 22 ISDN BRI DBM Probleme rse entegatse gonna petaweeaaee eaten ea 5 23 E Tests Available cs c3 cere peered aero es tiae deta REA cea eae ee ee 5 23 MS PVO TESIS ccd cere iia arira ieda See ch Stag heh em a ent 5 28 Network Port BRI Internal PVC Loopback 24 5 28 Send P AWT oai aiina east eect hes ay eld eae eae eee eaten Peete 5 29 Montor PARON sic cs cca ees nce ts ad a Pa sce eae eae esta eats 5 30 GOMMONI 2uhiG sited ohh eee he eae Rhee eases cea 5 30 iv August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Contents Physical TOSS ccs vain nnde Gaend bended Meee Bhd Ma bod Rhee Ke ee BA 5 30 CSU External Network Loopback 000 eee eee eee eee 5 31 DSU Internal Network Loopback
108. 621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions DDS Interface Specific Definitions dds JD interfaces 2 9621 A2 GH30 00 The DDS Interface Specific Definitions contain objects that are used to manage the DDS Network Interface All of these objects are supported by the FrameSaver access unit except as described below Object Description Setting Contents DDS Status Table ddsAlarmStatus A bitmap represented asa Supports only the following ddsStatusEntry 4 sum which can represent conditions multiple conditions i a simultaneously operationa It is used to view current m 2 crossPairDetected alarm conditions m 4 noSignal m 8 outOfService m 16 outOfFrame m 32 excessiveBPVs ddsClearChannel Controls whether data Not supported DataScrambling scrambling is used This is ddsConfigEntry 3 to prevent Latching Loopbacks caused by application data ddsInBandManage Configures the speed of the Not supported mentChannel proprietary in band ddsConfigEntry 4 managment channel ddsInBandFraming Controls whether an ASCII Not supported ErrorAlarm alarm is generated when ddsConfigEntry 9 in band framing errors occur August 1997 C 37 MIB Descriptions C 38 Object Description Setting Contents DDS Test Table ddsTestStatus A bitmap represented asa Supports only the following ddsTestEntry 2 sum which can represent conditions multiple condit
109. 7 8 9 10 LMI Clearing Event N3 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LMI Status Enquiry N1 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 255 LMI Heartbeat T1 3 4 5 10 15 20 25 30 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 LMI Link Status Change Alarm 3 Enable Disable DLCI Status Change Alarm 4 Enable Disable 1 Enable is the default for data ports and network interface Auto is the default for an ISDN BRI DBM 2 User Side is the default for the network interface and answering BRI B channel Network Side is the default for data ports and originating BRI B channel 3 Not shown when the port s LMI Personality is set to None 4 Not shown when the network interface s LMI Personality is set to Network Side 5 Not shown for the network interface August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Worksheets DLCI Records Configuration Worksheet Recording DLCI records is not necessary when using the configuration shortcuts FR Discovery feature which automatically configures these records Main Menu gt Configuration Ports gt Port 1 Port 2 gt DLC Records Main Menu gt Configuration Network ISDN BRI DBM gt DLC Records Device Name Refer to DLCI Records Options Table 4 6 Interface Link Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Port 1 DLCI Number 16 1007 Port 2 Network DLCI
110. 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Control Characters Sequence ASCII Hex A or a SOH 0x01 B or b STX 0x02 C or c ETX 0x03 D or d EOT 0x04 E or e ENQ 0x05 F or f ACK 0x06 G or g BEL 0x07 H or h BS 0x08 Al or i HT 0x09 J or LF or NL Ox0A K or k VT 0x0B AL orl FF or NP 0x0C M or m CR 0x0D N or n SO 0x0E O or o SI 0x0F P or p DLE 0x10 Q or q DC1 0x11 R or r DC2 0x12 S or s DC3 0x13 AT or t DC4 0x14 U or u NAK 0x15 AV or 4v SYN 0x16 AW or w ETB 0x17 X or x CAN 0x18 Y or y EM 0x19 AZ or z SUB Ox1A A One Ay ESC 0x1B or FS 0x1C ory GS 0x1D AN or A RS Ox1E AR US Ox1F August 1997 4 57 Setting Up Setting Up to Support a Telnet and or FTP Session Select Telnet and FTP Session to enable or disable a Telnet or download session Telnet configuration options control whether a Telnet session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session see Table 4 11 Only one Telnet session can be active at any one time gt Procedure 1 4 58 Set the Node IP Address Node Subnet Mask Default Network Destination if it is the COM port or a management PVC has been specified and the communication port s Link Protocol if the current setting is different from PPP see Table 4 13 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt
111. 997 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions The MIB Management Information Base descriptions listed here provide clarification for the MIB objects when it is not clear how the object definition in the applicable RFC is related to the FrameSaver access unit Otherwise the MIB object is supported as documented in the RFC This chapter is organized according to the MIBs supported by the FrameSaver access unit MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 1315 m Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 Enterprise MIB MIB II Descriptions RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 9621 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver access unit supports the following MIB II object groups as defined in RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m System group m Interfaces group Supported for the network DDS interface synchronous data ports and the COM port The Evolution of the Interfaces Group RFC 1573 is also supported by the access unit Interface statistics only apply to the COM port m P Internet Protocol group m ICMP Internet Control Management Protocol group TCP Transmission Control Protocol group UDP User Datagram Protocol group August 1997 C 1 MIB Descriptions System Group C 2 Transmission group Supported on the DDS interfaces using the DDS Enterprise MIB Supported on the frame relay logical link interfaces Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 using the Frame Relay Services or Frame Relay DTE MIBs Su
112. Access Levels 6 6 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 6 7 Creating a LOJN 2 2 4 steeedenae artati LEAU Pease data cage a i a 6 9 Deleting a LOQ N sssr cave rniii erka eirda ewik ee date cede e date ee 6 10 August 1997 v Contents A Menu Hierarchy B Configuration Worksheets vi Recording Configurations estec renser inori tiine EE B 1 When Using Auto Configuration Shortcuts s sasaaa B 1 Entering Configurations sirere bine aena ra i a a ai e B 2 Physical Interface Configuration Worksheets 20202e000 B 2 Network Physical Options Worksheet 0eeeeeeeeeee B 2 Port Physical Options Worksheet 0 0c c cece e eee eens B 3 Port 1 Compression Options Worksheet 00000e eee B 4 ISDN BRI DBM Options Worksheet 022000 cece eens B 5 Frame Relay Options Configuration Worksheet 000000s B 6 DLCI Records Configuration Worksheet 0 eee eee eee eens B 7 PVC Connection Table Configuration Worksheet 0005 B 8 General Options Configuration Worksheet 000cce eee n ees B 9 User Interface Options Configuration Worksheets 0006 B 10 Communication Port Options Worksheet 202 0ee B 10 External Device Options Worksheet 00 0 eee e eee nee B 11 COM Port Call Setup Worksheet 0 cee cece eee B 11 Telnet and FTP Session Options Worksheet 0005 B 12 Alarm O
113. Access to the access unit was attempted and failed SNMP protocol message not properly authenticated Three unsuccessful attempts were made to enter a correct login password combination IP address security is enabled and a message was received from SNMP Manager whose address was not on the list of approved managers Traps linkUp and linkDown D 2 Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is up and operational interfaces is up and operational August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps The interfaces that support these traps and conditions that define linkUp and linkDown for each interface include the following Interface linkUp Down Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer Represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table DDS Network Supported by the media specific DDS Enterprise MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 ddsStatus DDS Enterprise MIB linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Alarm conditions include No Signal Out of Service Out of Frame Cr
114. B1 BRI B channel 1 FR UNI Frame Relay logical link sublayers ifLinkUpDown Trap Enable ifXEntry 14 Indicates whether linkUp linkDown or enterprise specific traps should be generated COM port not supported NOTE SNMP Traps must be enabled for the access unit see SNMP Trap Options screen Main Configuration Management and Communication SNMP Traps ifHighSpeed ifXEntry 15 Automatically inserts the ifSpeed setting for the interface read only m 0 499 999 bps ifHighSpeed 0 All interfaces supported ifConnector Present ifXEntry 17 Indicates whether there is a physical connector for the interface m true 1 Always have this value for the DDS network data ports and COM port interfaces false 2 Always have this value for the BRI B channel and frame relay logical link sublayers August 1997 C 9 MIB Descriptions Interface Stack Group C 10 The Interface Stack Group is used by the FrameSaver access unit to show the relationship between a logical interface and a physical interface that is between the frame relay DTE or service side of the logical link sublayer and the DDS network or data ports The following table provides clarification for objects contained in the Interface Stack group when it is not clear how the object definition in RFC 1573 is supported by the access unit Object Description Setting Contents ifStackHi
115. BM Call Profiles Up to three call profiles can be set up Main Menu gt Control 3 ISDN Call Profiles ISDN Call Profile Field Name Entry ISDN Call Profile Status Enable Disable Destination up to 8 characters If the ISDN BRI B channel is set to Originate Called ID up to 36 characters This is the phone number to call If the ISDN BRI B channel is set to Answer Calling ID 1 up to 36 characters This is the phone number to accept call Calling ID 2 up to 36 characters This is the phone number to accept call 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 B 5 Configuration Worksheets Frame Relay Options Configuration Worksheet B 6 Use this worksheet to record network port and BRI configuration option settings Main Menu gt Configuration Ports gt Port 1 Port 2 Frame Relay Main Menu gt Configuration Network BRI B1 Frame Relay gt Frame Relay Device Name Refer to Frame Relay Options Table 4 5 Interface Port 1 Port 2 Network or BRI B1 Circle One Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Link Status 1 Enable Auto Disable Inbound CIR Enforcement Mode Forced Standard Discard Outbound CIR Enforcement Mode Forced Standard Buffered LMI Personality 2 User Side Network Side None LMI Protocol 3 4 Standard Annex A Annex D LMI Error Event N2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
116. C From DCE Out 1 DCE Received Data RXD From DCE Out 2 Signal Ground SG 3 DCE Transmit Data TXD To DCE In 4 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR To DCE In 5 DCE Carrier Detect CD From DCE Out 6 DCE Request to Send RTS To DCE In 7 DCE Received Clock RXC From DCE Out 8 August 1997 E 1 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable 3100 F2 540 Order this cable when connecting the COM port to a terminal or printer rather than to a PC it does not come with the FrameSaver access unit The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the terminal or printer interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position Modular Plug Tx Clock Rx Data Ground Tx Data DTR CD RTS Rx Clock 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DTE DB25 Plug Rx Data Ground Tx Data DTR CD CTS DSR RTS COM Port to PC Cable 3100 F2 550 496 14910 This cable comes with the FrameSaver access unit The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the PC interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position Modular Plug Tx Clock 1 Rx Data No Connection DTE DB9 Socket Ground Tx Data CD RTS 2 3 4 DTR 5 6 7 Rx Clock 8 No Connection N OQ O A WO DY Rx Data Ground Tx Data DTR CD CTS DSR RTS E 2 August 1997 496 14909 9621 A2 GH30 00 Cables Connectors and Pin Assi
117. Compression is set to Disable Frame Relay The DTE supports frame relay protocol Bit Synchronous The DTE supports a bit synchronous protocol HDLC SDLC PPP Bit Synchronous cannot be selected if more than one DLCI is defined for the port Compression Ratio Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Generates an alarm message when the compression ratio falls below a configurable threshold for the compressed DLCls on Port 1 Compression Ratio Alarm does not appear if Compression is set to Disable Enable Generates Compression Ratio Alarm Disable Does not generate Compression Ratio Alarm Connection Failure Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Generates an alarm message when the connection for data compression between a local and remote access unit fails or cannot be established for the compressed DLCls on Port 1 Connection Failure Alarm does not appear if Compression is set to Disable Enable Does not generate a Connection Failure Alarm Disable Generates the Connection Failure Alarm 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 29 Setting Up Table 4 2 Port 1 Compression Options 2 of 2 Flow Control Possible Settings Clock CTS None Default Setting Clock Controls the flow of data sent from the DTE to the access unit Flow Control does not appear if Compression is set to Disable Clock Varies the
118. Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Protocol Specify the Primary DLCI number used for the management PVC for the frame relay interface see Table 4 14 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Set the Telnet and FTP Sessions configuration options Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface Telnet and FTP Sessions The Telnet and FTP Session Options screen appears The configuration options are in the following table see Table 4 11 Set the Port Use configuration option to Net Link see Table 4 9 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface Communication Port This terminates the async terminal link and allows access via a Telnet or FTP session August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 11 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 2 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the access unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the access unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password referred to as the login are required to access the
119. Connection to another DCE requires a cross over cable Internal The COM port uses internal clocking External The COM port uses external clocking Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Alarm Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port NOTES ASCII alarm messages may also be supported when the asynchronous terminal interface is not in use If the Default Network Destination is set to COM see Table 4 13 and you change Port Use to Terminal or Alarm the Default Network Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM port is the asynchronous terminal interface port Net Link The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port Alarm The COM port is the ASCII alarm message port This is an output only selection and cannot be used for the user interface CAUTIONS If Net Link is used with an external modem attached to the COM port be aware of the potential security risk of unwanted access to the NMS or to other devices on the LAN to which the access device has routing table entries for subnet or host routes If you are to maintain a connection with the access unit you need to have an alternate management path Telnet through a PVC configured before selecting Alarms and saving the configuration August 1997 4 51 Setting Up 4 52 Table 4 9 Communication Port Options 2 of 4 Port Type Possible Settings
120. Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for warmStart or authenticationFailure events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends the following trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Enterprise specific traps generated for the following events enterpriseSelfTestFail 2 Access unit hardware failure was detected during the access unit s self test enterpriseDeviceFail 3 An internal device failures was detected by the access unit s operating software enterpriseTestStart 5 At least one test was started on an interface or virtual circuit enterprise TestStop 105 All tests have stopped on an interface or virtual circuit enterpriseConfigChange 6 The configuration has been changed via the user interface or the NMS Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Settin
121. Entry 17 object ifOutNUcastPkts ifEntry 18 object a ifOutDiscards ifEntry 19 object a ifOutErrors ifEntry 20 object m ifOutQLenCirEntry ifEntry 21 object ifSpecific ifEntry 22 Identifies each index in iflndex DDS network Company enterprise s name 2 24 2 6 2 COM port ios org dod internet mgmt mib 2 transmission rs232 Data ports ios org dod internet mgmt mib 2 transmission rs232 BRI B1 channels 0 0 a DTE side of frame relay ios org dod internet mgmt mib 2 transmission frame relay Service side of frame relay ios org dod internet mgmt mib 2 transmission frnetservMIB 1 Applies to the frame relay logical link sublayer on the network and data port interfaces Also applies to the COM port interface if it is configured as a network communications link When COM port is not configured as a network communications link these statistics will not be collected and an error status will be sent if access is attempted August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Extension to Interface Table ifX Table MIB Descriptions This extension contains additional objects for the interface table Supports only the following objects Object Description Setting Contents ifName ifXEntry 1 Provides name of the interface Interface test strings Network DDS COM COM port m S01Pn Slot 01 Port 1 or 2 BRI
122. Excess Burst Size NOTE If data compression is used and it is expected that the FrameSaver 9620 s actual port throughput CIR will exceed the PVC s CIR and the excess burst size will be exceeded then do not select Standard or Discard as a CIR enforcement mode CIR enforcement is also known as traffic shaping 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 1 9 About the FrameSaver 9620 The following tables indicate how the access unit responds based upon the frame and the CIR enforcement setting See the Inbound CIR Enforcement Mode Outbound CIR Enforcement Mode CIR bps and Excess Burst Size Bits configuration options in Tables 4 5 and 4 6 of Chapter 4 Setting Up Inbound CIR Enforcement configuration option And Inbound CIR If Frame is Enforcement is set to Then Within CIR and Forced Frame forwarded Within CIR plus excess burst size and Standard Not discard eligible Discard m Within CIR and Forced Frame forwarded with sic DE set Within CIR plus excess burst size and Standard Discard eligible Discard Above CIR but Forced DE set then Frame ick forwarded Within CIR plus excess burst size and Standard Not discard eligible Discard Above CIR but Forced Frame forwarded with ici DE set Within CIR plus excess burst size and Standard Discard eligible Discard Above CIR plus Forced DE set then Frame excess burst size and forwarded Not
123. FRAME RELAY ACCESS UNIT MODEL 9620 9621 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Document No 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 Copyright 1997 Paradyne Corporation Copyright 1993 Stac Electronics including one or more U S Patent No 5550700 and other pending patents All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additi
124. Feature Number Power Supplies 120 Vac for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 020 220 Vac for 1 Slot Housing Universal Power Supply 9001 F1 040 Cables V 35 DTE Adapter Cable 3100 F 1 570 connects Port 1 or 2 to DTE s V 35 interface EIA 530A to V 35 1 RJ45 Backup BKP ISDN U 20 3100 F2 500 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable 3100 F2 540 8 pin modular to DB25P 14 COM Port to PC Cable 3100 F2 550 8 pin modular to DB25P 14 COM Port to LAN Cable 3100 F2 910 8 pin modular to DB25P 14 RJ48S Network NET 14 3600 F3 501 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Glossary agent aggregate alternate destination ASCII ASCII terminal printer async terminal or emulation asynchronous AT Command Set ATM authentication Failure trap Autobaud mode AWG B channel BECN BKP BPV BRI CC CCA 9621 A2 GH30 00 A software program housed within a device to provide SNMP functionality Each SNMP agent stores management information and responds to the manager s request for this information A single bit stream that combines two or more bit streams A designated port DLCI and EDLCI that provides an alternate path for backup when the primary link or path is out of service American Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit code that establishes compatibility between data services ASCII is the standard for data transmission over telephone lines The ASCII code consists
125. IB Descriptions RFC 1315 The frame relay object defined by RFC 1315 is supported for both the Network and synchronous data ports when the interface is configured to support the DTE side of the frame relay UNI An interface is considered to support the DTE side when the LMI Personality is configured for DTE side or None The Frame Relay DTEs MIB is composed of the following groups and a global object Data Link Connection Management Interface DLCMI group m Circuit Group m Error Group C 16 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 DLCMI Group 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions The DLCMI group consists of the Data Link Connection Management Interface table Clarification for objects contained in this table is provided below Object Description Setting Contents frDicmiState Corresponds to the LMI Supports the following values PIM EnY 2 Sie e to NoLmiConfigured 1 An LMI is support the LMI is not supported on this interface determined indirectly LMIRev1 2 The standard LMI based on the protocol is supported on this interface supported m ansiT1 617 D 3 The LMI supported on this interface complies with ANSI T1 617 Annex D ccitt Q933 A 4 The LMI on this interface complies with CCITT Q 933 Annex A This value is not supported by the standard MIB The value for ANSI T1 617 Annex B 4 has been redefined to support CCITT Q 933 frDIcmiAddress Describes the address Supports only
126. M LED definition LEDs selecting a port to monitor viewing limited distance modem 4 31 limiting direct async terminal access SNMP access 6 5 through IP addresses Telnet access Link Destination Protocol Source Status Traps Traps Interfaces link layer protocols linkUp and linkDown events 4 75 linkUp Down traps LL definition GL 4 LMI Clearing Event N3 4 39 definition Error Event N2 4 39 Heartbeat T1 4 40 Inbound Heartbeat T2 4 40 Link Status Change Alarm N4 Measurement Period T3 Personality Protocol Status Enquiry N1 4 40 local external DTE loopback management 1 4 9621 A2 GH30 00 locked out Login creating deleting ID Required login logout how to logins Loopback GL 4 DSU Latching external DTE latching Port DTE Initiated PVC loopbacks available LSD definition GL 5 M maintaining COM port directories ISDN call profiles maintenance Management and Communication configuration worksheets options 4 63 configuring end to end control control and IP addressing creating a separate link General SNMP options local and remote paths PVCs selecting interface SNMP using a dedicated DLCI using circuit multiplexing EDLCI VC signaling a ea a c 24 managing access a manual backup 5 10 manual link profile menu y user LEN 1 7 Menus mesh il definition GL 5 Mes
127. M or dropping DSR when the backup link configured is a data port August 1997 1 17 About the FrameSaver 9620 Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for assistance in configuring this feature and Chapter 5 of the User s Guide Maintenance and Troubleshooting for information about backup messages Contact your sales representative to order this feature Using an External Modem or Other Backup Device 1 18 A crossover cable is required when connecting an external modem or other backup device to one of the access unit s DTE ports When an external backup device is used the access unit assumes that all alternate data paths are to the same destination and that the backup device will handle security When using an external backup device the external device must be configured to dial another modem upon detecting raised DTR data terminal ready and the access unit s data port connected to the external backup device must be configured as the backup link the alternate destination link and to support the DTR control lead If the backup device is configured to originate backup the access unit raises DSR data set ready when a failure is detected signaling the backup device to dial another backup device Once connection between the backup devices is established data is switched to the alternate backup path A backup connection is terminated when the LMI declares the primary DLCI active and the access unit drops DSR data set rea
128. NMS Security Options 2 of 2 NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP messages to the access unit If an SNMP message is received from the NMS whose IP address does not match an address contained in this field access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding access level 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address The first digit i e n7N 255 255 255 can be any number from 001 through 223 excluding 127 Remaining digits i e 255 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears the NMS IP address and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed If the IP address for the NMS sending an SNMP message is on the list of allowed managers this configuration option determines the type of access allowed for that manager Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read
129. Port 2 20005 2 3 Configuring an External Device Connected to the COM Port 2 4 Configuring End to End Management Control 000 ee eee 2 5 Management Control Using a Dedicated DLC 2 5 Management Control Using Circuit Multiplexing EDLC 2 6 Transparent Management Control Using RFC 1490 Routers 2 7 m Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme 0 cece eee eee 2 8 m P Addressing Scheme Examples 00000c cece eee eee eaee 2 9 Direct PVCs to Remote Access Units 2220 ceeeeeeee 2 9 Routing to Remote Access Units on the Same Subnet 2 10 Routing to Remote Access Units Using Different Subnets 2 11 Routing to Remote Access Units Using Routers 2 12 Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks 00000 eee 2 13 3 Typical Applications DDS Access to Frame Relay Application 02000e eee eee 3 1 m Mixing Access Units in Applications 0 0c cece eee 3 2 m Data Compression Application 0 0 0 e cece eee eee 3 4 m Frame Relay Port Aggregation and Circuit Multiplexing Application 3 5 m Frame Relay Switching Application 00 cc cece eee eee 3 6 m Using Configuration Shortcuts 0 sssaaa aussen ee eens 3 7 a Backup Applicalons 6 iva eee beeen eee er eee eee eee ees 3 9 Backing Up to the Primary Destination Node 3 11 Backing Up to a Neighbor
130. Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary DLCI number used for the management PVC once the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI Primary DLCI is blank if the Primary Link field is blank NOTE Clearing Primary Link also clears Primary DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive August 1997 4 67 Setting Up 4 68 Table 4 14 Management PVCs Options 3 of 4 Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected for the primary frame relay link EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Primary EDLCI does not appear if the Primary DLCI field does not contain a Primary DLCI that references a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing Primary
131. Status Object devStatus ID devStatus 1 C 39 Frame Relay PVC Cross Connect Table pvcXconnect CTOSSC ONECO Jie sooo ee encase hae te dees ee eg ee a a C 39 August 1997 vii Contents Frame Relay PVC Test Group devPVCTest IDFrameRelay 3 C 39 Frame Relay Clear Statistics Group frame relay clear stat DFrameRelay I wiceoe chant eter dace etiea steer tea bee C 39 Frame Relay Extension Group devFrExt IDFrameRelay 4 C 40 Frame Relay Data Compression Group frNetDcp IDFrameRelay 2 vi csccatddedde tad Sete tee cad eee ed Be EEEREN C 40 IP Route Table deviPRouteTable ID ip 1 C 40 D Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps E ap warmia siou uese eens geese aa an ciate daha E eee pneat des D 1 E Trap authenticationFailure 00 eaa a a a eee D 2 m Traps linkUp and linkKDown 00 0 cece eee D 2 m Traps enterprise Specific 0 0 cece eee D 5 E Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments E COMPOT iia ee acne eed phage tele aaa dd vce ee E 1 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable 3100 F2 540 E 2 COM Port to PC Cable 3100 F2 550 0202 eee eee E 2 COM Port to LAN Cable 3100 F2 910 cece eaee E 3 m Modular RJ48S Network Cable 0 0 c cece eee eee E 3 Gender Adapter Changer 000 cece eee cece eee eee eee E 3 m Modular RJ45 ISDN U Backup Interface 2 2020 eae E 4 E EIA 232E Port 1 or2 Ntenac
132. Table screen to add or change PVC connections between a source DLCI link and destination DLCI link on a frame relay interface Also to add or change an alternate destination DLCI for backup when the primary link or destination DLCI is down and a backup link has been established 3 When New is selected the configuration option field is blank Tab to the first configuration option and press the spacebar The first valid selection appears in the field NOTE Management links are not created using this screen Go to the Management PVC Entry screen Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Frame relay is a peer level protocol If backup is used there is no particular significance to which DLCI is designated as the source or destination it is a matter of user preference However if backup is used the Primary Destination DLCI may have an alternate destination specified Table 4 7 PVC Connections Options 1 of 4 Source Link Possible Settings Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLC or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 2 has no DLCls defined Port 2 would not appear as a
133. Tampa Florida ASCII text entry Where you enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 4 characters Interface IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address configuration option see Table 4 13 Communication Protocol Options Special 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the IP address for the unit s management PVC when the IP address is different for this interface The first digit i e nnn 255 255 255 can be any number from 001 through 223 excluding 127 Remaining digits i e 255 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears the source destination link and the DLCI field and suppresses the source destination EDLCI field 4 66 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 14 Management PVCs Options 2 of 4 Interface Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node IP Mask Calculate Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Default Setting Node IP Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an externa
134. Test Category Physical and Logical Test Type Logical Physical Local Loopbacks Pattern Tests Test Network CSU Loopback Network DSU Loopback Port 1 DTE External Loopback Port 2 DTE External Loopback Network Send Monitor 511 Port 1 Send Monitor 511 Port 2 Send Monitor 511 PVC Loopbacks Network DLCI nnnn Loopback N N Y Y N Y Y Port 1 DLCI nnnn Loopback Port 2 DLCI nnnn Loopback BRI DLCI nnnn Loopback Pattern Tests Network DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Network DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Port 1 DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Port 1 DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Port 2 DLCI nnnn Send Pattern Port 2 DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern BRI DLCI nnnn Send Pattern BRI DLCI nnnn Monitor Pattern Connectivity Network DLCI nnnn Port 1 DLCI nnnn Port 2 DLCI nnnn BRI DLCI nnnn 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 25 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Test Matrix 3 of 4 Test Category Logical and Logical Test Type Logical PVC Loopbacks Connectivity Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI Test DLCI DLCI DLCI DLCI Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI Logical i nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn DLCI DLCI DLCI DLCI g Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn PVC Network y2 Y Y Y y2 Y Y Y
135. User Interface External Device Com Port NOTE To detect when the external device connection has been lost the COM port s DTR lead should be connected to the external device s DSR lead using a standard EIA 232 crossover cable the COM port s DTR lead is monitored for loss of connection The external device must be configured to drop DSR when a disconnect occurs and to ignore DTR Table 4 10 External Device COM Port Options 1 of 2 External Device Commands Possible Settings Disable AT Other Default Setting Disable Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port NOTE The Carrier Detect CD lead detects loss of the external device therefore the external device must not force CD on Disable Commands will not be sent over the COM port AT Standard Attention AT Commands are sent over the COM port to control the external device All AT command strings will end with a carriage return hex Ox0D anda line feed hex 0x0A Other Commands configured by the user are sent out the COM port CAUTION You must not use this setting if you have an async terminal connected to the COM port NOTE Connect Prefix Connect Indication String Escape Sequence Escape Sequence Delay and Disconnect String options will only be used when the setting is Other Refer to the Control Characters table on page 4 57 Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable
136. a Cross Connection of the DLCls are configured incorrectly Verify the PVC connections DLCls and CIRs agree with those of the service provider DLCI is inactive on the frame relay network Verify that DLCI s is active on the PVC Connection Status screen If DLCI s is not active contact the service provider Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration LMI is not configured properly for the DTE or network Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE or network LMI is not configured properly for the DTE network or BRI channel Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE network or BRI channel LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Network Performance Statistics status messages received will increment Losing Data CIR and Excess Burst Size is incorrectly configured Verify the Network and Port CIR and Excess Burst Size agree with those of the service provider Frame relay network is experiencing problems Run PVC Loopback and Pattern tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 ISDN BRI DBM Problems Tests Available 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Refer to the Last Cause Values in Chapter 5 of the User s Guide M
137. a phone directory and view its phone number or to initiate and terminate external modem connections over the access unit s COM port Used for management COM Port Call Directories Change the phone number contained in a selected directory when using an external modem ISDN Call Profiles Enable the DBM s call profile provide an identifier or name for the profile s destination enter the phone number to call and the Calling ID Used for backup 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Displaying or Changing COM Port Directory Numbers gt Procedure To display a COM port directory phone number use the following menu sequence Main Menu gt Control gt COM Port Call Setup gt Procedure To change a COM port directory phone number 1 Use the following menu sequence Main Menu gt Control COM Port Call Directories 2 To select the directory to be changed press the number of the desired directory 1 through 5 or A for Alarm and press Return The phone number for that directory appears 3 Review or change the phone number Make sure only valid characters are entered when changing the phone number Valid characters Numbers 0 9 Lowercase letters a z Uppercase letters A Z Space _ character ASCII symbols with the exception of the caret Control sequence using the caret 4 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen fu
138. abled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated inclusive LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies only to the user side of the UNI LMI Heartbeat T1 does not appear if LMI Personality is set to User Side or None Compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies only to the network side of the UNI LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 does not appear if LMI Personality is set to User Side or None Compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which determines the maximum
139. ad Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands Setting Up for SNMP NMS Security Select SNMP NMS Security to display add or change the SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver access unit A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the access unit by SNMP Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security See Table 4 16 for SNMP NMS Security configuration options Table 4 16 SNMP NMS Security Options 1 of 2 NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Allows access only if IP address of the sending manager is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the access unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 71 Setting Up Table 4 16 SNMP
140. aintenance and Troubleshooting for more information about ISDN problems Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information about configuration Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Cannot connect to remote unit Misconfiguration 1 Check that the call profile is correct on both units 2 Check that the remote unit is configured to answer 3 Check that autobackup is enabled and no time restrictions apply BRI LMI comes up but no data is transferred Misconfiguration Check that the DLCI numbers are correct and are the same at both ends The Test menu allows you to run loopbacks and test patterns on the FrameSaver access unit and to test the front panel LEDs It is available to users with a security access level of 1 or 2 From the Test menu To access Select PVC tests for the network interface Network PVC Tests PVC tests for Port 1 Port 1 PVC Tests 1 PVC tests for Port 2 Port 2 PVC Tests PVC tests for B channel BRI PVC Tests Physical tests for the Network interface Network Physical Tests Physical tests for Port 1 Port 1 Physical Tests Physical tests for Port 2 Port 2 Physical Tests Device Tests for the access unit Device Tests interface 1 PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when there are no PVCs defined for the The following table matrix shows which tests can be run concurrently It shows p
141. al interface Service supported 8 position modular keyed jack RJ49C ISDN service 1B D August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Technical Specifications Specification Criteria Optional Features ISDN BRI DBM Weight 0 27 lbs 0 12 kg 4 3 oz 122 grams Standards Compliance ANSI T1 601 1992 physical layer AT amp T Document 235 900 311 Issue 1 01 March 1989 Bellcore SR NWT 001937 Issue 1 February 1991 Bellcore SR NWT 002397 Issue 1 June 1993 ITU Q 921 1992 link layer ITU Q 931 1993 network layer Northern Telecom NIS S208 4 October 1988 TR TSY 00860 ISDN Calling Number Identification Services February 1989 and Supplement June 1990 Switch Compatibility National ISDN 1 NI 1 Switched Network Interface One USOC RJ45 8 pole keyed modular plug and jack specified in ISO IEC 8877 Transmit Interface Signal Level Impedance 13 5 dBm nominal over frequency band 0 Hz 80 kHz 1350 Receive Interface Dynamic Range Impedance Operates on 2 wire loops defined in ANSI T1 601 1992 1350 Modulation and Frequency 2B1Q line coding with 4 level amplitude modulation PAM at 80K baud Channel Equalization Receiver Automatic adaptive equalizer with echo cancellation Power Consumption 60 mA at 15 Vdc Average power 9W August 1997 F 3 Equipment List 9621 A2 GH30
142. ation port options configuration option tables configuration worksheets external device COM port options 4 55 how to use resetting restoring access Telnet session 4 58 viewing alarms and LEDs 5 2 August 1997 IN 11 Index user side DLCI Status Change Alarm LMI Personality 4 38 user s guide user to network interface UNI 3 11 USOC definition GL 6 V V 35 DTE adapter cable Port Type Vac valid COM port directory characters ISDN call profile ID characters Value Out of Range message variable clock Flow Control rate 1 13 VC signaling management MIB group viewing alarm messages 5 3 alarms and LEDs 5 2 virtual circuit GL 6 VT100 compatible terminal W WAN definition warmStart events General Traps trap warranty A IN 12 worksheets August 1997 alarm auto backup criteria B 18 COM portl COM port call setup communication protocol configuration DLCI records external device frame relay B 6 general SNMP management ISDN BRI DBM Management PVCs management and communications B 13 management PVCs network physical interface B 2 physical port Port 1 compression PVC connection table SNMP NMS security trap records Telnet and FTP session 9621 A2 GH30 00
143. ault Setting for user data ports and network interface Enable Default Setting for BRI channels Auto Determines whether the frame relay link for the interface is in service or out of service Enable Frame relay link is in service It causes data packets to be transmitted received on the interface and the LMI will be active f adata port or Network is the interface select Enable to activate the interface s frame relay link a f an ISDN BRI DBM B channel is the interface select Enable for manual backup or when testing the ISDN link This setting causes the DBM to originate or answer a call based upon how it is configured see the Originate or Answer configuration option in Table 4 4 If configured to originate a call the DBM dials the Called ID in the ISDN Call Profile for the B channel configured as the Alternate Destination Link If the B channel is disabled or already busy the Called ID associated with the alternate B channel is called If configured to answer a call the DBM waits for a call on the B channel configured as the Alternate Destination Link This allows testing of a B channel link Auto Frame relay link is in service as conditions warrant Select Auto for a B channel or for a port connected to an external device e g a modem when Auto Backup is desired see the Auto Backup configuration option in Table 4 18 It causes data packets to be transmitted received on the interface and the LMI to be active when
144. been issued by the user or since the circuit was created if a clear has never been issued The values of the objects are m frMgtVCSigNetLinkRelErrors frMgtVCSigEntry 14 Reliability Errors statistic m frMgtVCSigNetProtErrors frMgtVCSigEntry 15 Protocol Errors statistic m frMgtVCSigNetChaninactive frMgtVCSigEntry 16 Number of Inactives statistic August 1997 C 25 MIB Descriptions PVC End Point Group C 26 The PVC End Point Group consists of the PVC End Point Table which contains an entry for each virtual circuit identified by DLCI number supported on a specific frame relay interface identified by iflndex This table contains an entry for a specific DLCI only when a DLCI record has been created for it Creation and deletion of DLCls through the circuit table is not supported by the FrameSaver access unit All objects in this table are treated as read only by the FrameSaver access unit unless otherwise specified Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents frPVCEndPtDLCI Contains the DLC number Corresponds to the DLCI Index for the virtual circuit onthe configuration option and can range frPVCEndpt frame relay interface from 16 to 1007 Entry 1 This is a nonaccessible index a getnext must be used to obtain the first object supported With a returned OID getnext
145. ber from 001 through 223 excluding 127 However 000 is valid representing a null address Remaining digits i e 255 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears Node IP Address and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which you can view or edit Clear Clears Node Subnet Mask and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 63 Setting Up 4 64 Table 4 13 Communication Protocol Options 2 of 3 Default Network Destination Possible Settings None COM PVCname Default Setting None Specifies where a default network destination or route is connected so that data without a specifically defined PVC will have a route Examples If the default network is connected to the communications port you would select COM If the default network
146. bnet 135 18 40 0 PVC Connection 496 14912 01 2 9 Management Control and IP Addressing Routing to Remote Access Units on the Same Subnet In this example Access Unit A is connected to m The NMS atthe central site Remote access units through management PVCs The illustration below shows two management PVCs at the central site with Access Units B and C connected through one management PVC 135 18 2 17 Ya es 135 18 2 18 135 18 2 26 Relay Network D Subnet 135 18 2 0 Physical Connection 2 10 August 1997 SNMP NMS Ethernet 135 18 40 1 LAN Adapter COM Port IP Address 135 18 40 3 135 18 2 1 Subnet 135 18 40 0 PVC Connection 496 1491 9621 A2 GH30 00 Management Control and IP Addressing Routing to Remote Access Units Using Different Subnets In this example Access Unit A is connected to The NMS atthe central site Two remote access units through management PVCs The illustration below shows two management PVCs with Access Units B and C connected through one management PVC By configuring a different IP address and subnet for each management PVC Access Units B and C share a subnet 135 18 3 0 m Access Units A and B share a different subnet 135 18 2 0 Access Units A and D share yet another subnet 135 18 4 0 Subnet 135 18 40 0 Eth t SNMP NMS erne Subnet 135 18 2 0 135 18 2 2 135 18 40 1
147. by the FrameSaver access unit is 40 This number cannot be changed through this object frDIcmiMultiCast frDicmiEntry 10 Indicates whether the frame relay interface is using a multicast service Supports only the following value m nonBroadcast 1 Only point to point connections are supported August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Circuit Group 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions The Circuit Group consists of the Circuit Table This table contains an entry for each virtual circuit defined by DLCI number supported on a specific frame relay interface identified by ifEntry This table contains any entry for a specific DLCI only when a DLCI record has been created for it The creation and deletion of DLCls through the Circuit Table is not currently supported by this product Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSaver access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents frCircuitDlci Contains the DLCI number Corresponds to the DLCI Number frCircuitEntry 2 for a virtual circuit on the configuration option range 16 to frame relay interface Only DLCls with a configured DLCI record are supported Supported as an index and a read only value 1007 frCircuitState frCircuitEntry 3 Indicates whether the particular virtual circuit is operational This object can only be used to place a circuit in or out of service It ca
148. cal directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp command Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a list of all Known commands is printed Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used put file file2 Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2in the current directory of the access unit recv file1 file 2 Same as a get send file1 file 2 Same as a put pwd Print the name of the current directory of the access unit bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Performing a NAM Upgrade If you need to upgrade the NAM program code you must transfer the following files in the order specified by using the put command 1 2 3 NAM control file nam1_ctl ocd NAM Program Low Bank nam2_low ocd NAM Program Hi Bank nam3_hi ocd These files must all be the same version from the same revision level for a successful download format Rxxyyzz a b ocd NOTE Upgrades are performed over the COM port only B gt Procedure To perform a download 1 2 3 4 OO a Or Gl 9621 A2 GH30 00 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary mode Type cd system to change to the system directory
149. ccess unit may be stuck in Autobaud mode Monitor how long the access unit stays in Autobaud mode If DDS Line Rate kbps does not change to a line rate within a reasonable period of time then the access unit is stuck in Autobaud mode If stuck in Autobaud mode configure DDS Line Rate kbps for 56 or 64 kbps Not receiving data Network cable loose or broken DDS network is down Reconnect or repair the cable Call the network service provider Receiving data errors ona multiplexed DLCI but frame relay is okay FR Discovery is being used for automatic DLCI and PVC configuration and the equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant Change the DLCI Type for each network DLCI from Multiplexed to Standard turning off multiplexing August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Data Compression Problems Troubleshooting and Maintenance Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Compression Connection Failure Alarm or Trap The underlying DLCI is not operative Refer to Troubleshooting Problem Tables Frame Relay PVC Problems on page 5 22 The underlying DLCI does not have Compression enabled Configure Compression for DLCI Compression is not configured at both ends of the PVC Set the Compression configuration option to Enable at both ends Both access units on the PVC do not have the same compression mode Configure bot
150. ce Main Menu gt Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Return Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been terminated NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt Network or DTE initiated loopbacks Determining Test Status and Results Current test status and results are available on the Test screen from where you execute the test System and Test Status screen m NMS Test LED 5 36 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Downloading Software File Transfer 9621 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver access unit is capable of accepting a software download from a PC through its COM port to support a file transfer or software upgrade The Download feature is used only by your service representative to update your access unit The FrameSaver access unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP to allow you to transfer configuration files to from an access unit node and transfer program files to an access unit node A complete binary image of the configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup The unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Initiate an FTP session to an access unit node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer m You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put command
151. cleared August 1997 5 17 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 5 18 The following table explains the performance statistics that are cleared when you make selections For interface Select To clear Clear Statistics menu Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 All All statistics for all interfaces DDS network both ports and B channel statistics no additional menu appears Network Statistics for the selected interface Clear Interface Statistics menu appears Port 1 Port 2 BRI Clear Interface Statistics menu Network All All statistics for the selected interface Port 1 physical frame relay link frame relay error Port 2 frame relay LMI or selected DLCI BRI B1 Physical Only statistics associated with the physical interface DDS network NET port Port 1 or Port 2 or ISDN BRI DBM BKP Frame Relay Link Only frame relay link statistics for the selected interface Frame Relay Only frame relay error statistics for the Error selected interface Frame Relay LMI Only frame relay LMI statistics for the selected interface DLCI nnnn Statistics for the selected DLCI To select a DLCI Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics gt Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 Frame Relay gt PVCs gt DLCI gt nnnn Port 1 only Comp DLCI Compression statistics for the selected nnnn DLC 1 BRI selections only appear when an ISDN BRI DBM i
152. clock rate to match the current compression ratio on interchange circuits ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE source TXC and DD ITU 115 However if the Transmit Clock configuration option is set to External the DTE must match the ETXC rate to the TXC supplied by the access unit This flow control method provides higher throughput and lower latency for the compression connection This is the recommended method for flow control as long as the DTE can accept a varying clock CTS Turns CTS off when buffer space is low and on when sufficient buffer space exists to prevent the DTE from sending more data than can be handled The DTE should not send packets when CTS is turned off None Does not control the flow of data Continues to accept data from the DTE as long as there is adequate buffer space Packets will be discarded when the buffer is full This setting is not recommended and is only used if the DTE does not recognize or is not compatible with Flow Control Short Packet Bypass Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Avoids data compression of short data packets received from the DTE so performance is improved when data traffic predominantly consists of packets shorter than 80 bytes Short Packet Bypass does not appear if Compression is set to Disable Enable Does not compress short packets received from the DTE Disable Compresses all packets received from the DTE regardless
153. d CIR Enforcement 1 11 Mode output signal table MIB P pace E packets PAD definition GL 5 Parity Password 6 9 IN 8 pattern send monitor tests available performance statistics clearing Phone oe physical interface configuration worksheets B 2 ISDN BRI DBM options 4 34 network options port options tests 5 30 tests available pin assignments backup RJ45 interface ISDN U EIA 232E port connector interface RJ48S network point to point PPP protocol Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks 4 27 Access Level aggregation B 5 GL 5 asynchronous MIB table communication options compression options connector interface EIA 232E Destination Link 4 47 DTE external loopback 5 32 general MIB table Link Links 4 48 logical MIB group physical options PVC loopback Rate Kbps selecting for LED monitoring software configurable Status 4 25 synchronous MIB table definition Primary Destination Profile 4 48 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Primary Profile profile manual link Profile ID SPID Proprietary RIP Protocol Communication options 4 63 Link link layer LMI 4 39 modes 1 12 Point to Point PPP 4 65 Routing Information RIP Serial Line IP SLIP 4 65 Simple Network Management SNMP 4 70 PSTN definition GL 5 PVC connections worksheet ot Bea end point group MIB
154. d Common 102 7 B Transmitted Data TXD 103 2 A To DCE P A 14 B S B Received Data RXD 104 3 A From DCE R A 16 B T B Request to Send RTS 105 4 To DCE C Clear to Send CTS 106 5 From DCE D Data Set Ready DSR 107 6 From DCE E Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 2 20 To DCE H Data Channel Received Line 109 8 From DCE F Signal Detector RLSD or LSD Transmitter Signal Element Timing 113 11 A To DCE U A TT DTE Source 24 B W B Transmitter Signal Element Timing 114 15 A From DCE Y A TXC DCE Source 12 B AA B Receiver Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE A RXC DCE Source 9 B X B Local Loopback LL 141 18 To DCE L Test Mode Indicator TM 142 25 From DCE NN August 1997 E 7 Technical Specifications 9621 A2 GH30 00 Specification Criteria Network Access Module NAM Approvals FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 Industry Canada UL CSA Safety Class A digital device Refer to the equipment s label for the Registration Number Refer to the equipment s label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipment s label for the UL listing Refer to the equipment s label for CSA safety information Power Consumption and Dissipation 8 7 watts 0 124 amps rms input current at 120 volts ac power Result 30 Btu per hour Weight 2 59 Ibs 1 18 kg Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relati
155. data of multiple DLCls or data coming from multiple frame relay devices onto a single network DLCI This feature is referred to as circuit multiplexing Both aggregation and multiplexing use the following network configuration Cluster Controller Frame Relay FR IBM FEP Frame Relay Frame Router Relay Te FR aj Access Access Unit PVG Unit FR Frame Relay Physical Connection PVC Connection 97 14896a The example shows frame relay data coming in over Ports 1 and 2 with the frames being multiplexed onto a single network connection PVCs are aggregated in the same manner This sharing of PVCs i e multiplexing user DLCIs or management data frames with user data frames is a proprietary method When using this method you must either m Specify that you are using the PVC in this way and you can configure management data to be marked discard eligible DE so that user data has priority selected from the PVC Connection Entry screen or Configure a committed information rate CIR great enough that both management and user data frames can be carried by the PVC selected from the DLCI Record Entry screen 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 3 5 Typical Applications Frame Relay Switching Application Any DLCI on any port can be cross connected to any DLCI on any other port In addition any port can be configured to support either the user or network side of the UNI The following exampl
156. ding to battery manufacturer s instructions Attention Il y a danger d explosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du meme type Mettre au rebut les batteries usagees conformement aux instructions du fabricant In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Contents About This Manual m Purpose and Intended Audience 000 e cece eee eee ix m Document Organization 0 00 c cee ix m Conventions Used 0 nee nnana e een eee xi E Related Documents 2246204 eroe sede cdae nati ende teats ended ds xii 1 About the FrameSaver 9620 9621 A2 GH30 00 OVGINIOW weiace deci er saw peciaenis 4 a aai aa d uie ea B pete t 1 1 What Is Needed to Use Access Units in My Network 1 2
157. discard eligible Standard Discard Frame discarded Above CIR plus Forced Frame forwarded with excess burst size and DE set Discard eligible Standard Frame discarded Discard August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 Outbound CIR Enforcement configuration option And Outbound CIR If Frame is Enforcement is set to Then m Within CIR and Forced Frame forwarded Within CIR plus excess burst size Standard Buffered Above CIR but Forced Frame forwarded with DE Within CIR plus set excess burst size Standard Buffered Above CIR plus Forced Frame forwarded excess burst size Standard Frame discarded Buffered Frame held until CIR not exceeded About Data Compression Data compression available on Port 1 only is a feature that allows higher DTE port rates over the DDS network reducing network bandwidth as well as cost and time for transmissions without losing data When enabled port rates up to 256 kbps are supported This feature supports the Frame Relay Forum s Data Compression Over Frame Relay Implementation Agreement FRF 9 NOTE The local and remote FrameSaver 9620s maintain a connection between their compressors If the connection cannot be established because of network problems an alarm is generated See Chapter 3 Typical Applications for additional information 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 1 11 About the FrameSa
158. dy signaling the backup device to disconnect August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Management Control and IP Addressing This chapter contains the steps needed to provide management connectivity to the access unit You need to select and configure A method of local management connectivity for access units A method for end to end management connectivity across the network An IP addressing scheme that fits the local and end to end management connectivity methods Configuring Local Management Control When managing the access unit locally you can establish a management link in one of three ways You can Create a management DLCI using a DTE port Create a separate management link through the COM port Connect an external device modem LAN adapter etc to the COM port 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 2 1 Management Control and IP Addressing Configuring a Management DLCI Between the Router and Access Unit RFC 1490 Router Using DTE Port The following configuration shows the management connection using an RFC 1490 compliant frame relay IP router connected to one of the access unit s DTE ports As shown below in band management is accomplished through the dedicated PVC between the frame relay router or FRAD and the access unit Management Data Frame Relay REC 1490 Customer Data IP Router E Access Unit pem ee ae A Frame H E WAN Link Relay D CE DTE NET Network Port Port Port e 2 Config
159. e sv cadens pede vale de PERE a ina E 5 V 35 DTE Adapter Cable 3100 F2 570 00c cee ee eae E 6 F Technical Specifications G Equipment List Glossary Index viii August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About This Manual Purpose and Intended Audience Document Organization 9621 A2 GH30 00 This reference contains information needed to properly set up configure and verify operation of the FrameSaver 9620 access unit It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks Section Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Description About the FrameSaver 9620 Describes the access unit and its features and supported SNMP MIBs Management Control and IP Addressing Describes how you establish a management link and configure end to end management control Also provides guidelines for selecting an IP addressing scheme and shows examples of typical schemes with subnet masks assigned Typical Applications Shows typical applications of the access unit in a frame relay network Setting Up Provides instructions for configuring the access unit Also includes a recommended order for setup how to enter identity information how to set date and time and backup procedures Troubleshooting and Maintenance Provides troubleshooting and test procedures dial out pr
160. e for selection Profiles are identified by number This configuration option only appears when Source Destination Link is set to BRI and an ISDN Call Profile has been defined Primary Destination Link Possible Settings Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLC or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 2 has no DLCls defined Port 2 would not appear as a valid setting Network Specifies the network interface as the primary interface Port 1 or Port 2 Specifies the port as the primary interface BRI B1 Specifies the ISDN B channel 1 as the primary interface Clear Clears the Primary Destination Link and Primary Destination DLCI settings and suppresses Primary Destination EDLCI August 1997 4 47 Setting Up Table 4 7 PVC Connections Options 3 of 4 Primary Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no
161. e Access Unit ISDN BRI DBM s B Channel Physical Options Table 4 4 BRI B1 set to Enable Originate or Answer set to Originate BRI B1 set to Enable Originate or Answer set to Answer n a ISDN BRI DBM s B Channel Frame Relay Options Table 4 5 LMI Personality set to LMI Personality set to n a User Side Network Side PVC Connections Options Table 4 7 Source Source 1 Source Applicable data source Link set to BRI Profile Calling ID from the remote unit DLCI to the remote unit s Alternate Destination DLCl EDLCI Applicable data source Primary Destination Link set to Network DLCI to the central unit EDLCI Primary Destination Link set to Network to the central site 9120 or 9620 Profile DLCI to the central site s Alternate Destination DLCl EDLCI Primary Destination Link set to Network DLCI to the remote unit EDLCI Alternate Destination Link set to BRI Profile Called ID to the regional unit DLCI a EDLCI n a Alternate Destination m Link set to Network DLCI to the regional unit EDLCI Auto Backup Criteria Optio ns Table 4 18 Auto Backup set to Enable n a Auto Backup set to Enable 1 Only active when the remote unit calls and links with the regional unit While inactive waiting for a call an alarm will be generated and the regional uni
162. e Configuration To screen appears 7 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver access unit supports SNMP Version 1 which only provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access Disabling SNMP access Assigning SNMP community names and access levels Assigning IP addresses of NMSs that can access the access unit Disabling SNMP Access 9621 A2 GH30 00 The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration option to disable SNMP access to the unit When this configuration option is disabled the FrameSaver access unit will not respond to any SNMP messages and will not send SNMP traps B gt Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From gt Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication General SNMP Management The General SNMP Options screen appears
163. e Name Field Name Directory Number Directory Phone Number Directory Number Directory Phone Number Directory Number Directory Phone Number Directory Number Directory Phone Number Directory Number Directory Phone Number Directory Number Primary terminal or printer Directory Phone Number August 1997 Configuration Worksheets Telnet and FTP Session Options Worksheet Use this worksheet to record configuration option settings that set up access via Telnet sessions Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface Telnet and FTP Sessions Device Name Refer to Telnet and FTP Session Options Table 4 11 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Telnet Session Enable Disable Telnet Login Required Enable Disable Session Access Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Inactivity Timeout Enable Disable Disconnect Time Minutes 1 60 5 FTP Session Enable Disable FTP Login Required Enable Disable Alarm Options Configuration Worksheet Use this worksheet to record alarm and trap generation configuration options Main Menu gt Configuration Alarm Device Name Refer to Alarm Options Table 4 12 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold ASCII Alarm Messages Com Port Disable Alarm amp Trap Dial Out Enable Disable Trap Disconnect Enable Disable
164. e different for each interface The tests that support these traps and their variable bindings include the following Interface enterpriseTestStart Stop Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer DDS Network iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 ddsTestStatus DDS Enterprise MIB enterpriseTest Start The following tests are active on the interface DSU Loopback CSU Loopback Send 511 pattern Monitor 511 pattern enterpriseTest Stop No longer any tests running on the interface Synchronous Data Ports iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 iffestType RFC 1573 enterpriseTest Start Any of the following tests is active on the port DTE External Loopback Send 511 pattern Monitor 511 pattern enterpriseTest Stop No longer any tests running on the port Virtual Circuits DLCls Service Side of the Frame Relay Link iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 devPVCTestType Enterprise MIB frPVCEndptDLCllndex Frame Relay Services MIB enterpriseTest Start Any of the following tests is active on the DLCI PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern enterpriseTest Stop No longer any tests running on the port DTE Side of the Frame Relay
165. e interface same as then it refers to a iflndex proprietary interface not currently implemented by the MIB II Interface Group ipRouteTable Supported as read write To delete a route set object to ip 21 However use caution when invalid adding or modifying routes If it is absolutely necessary to add a route they should only be added to the connected device device closest to the destination Internal routing mechanisms will propagate the route to the other devices Routes over management PVCs do not appear in the ipRoute table Access these routes via the Enterprise MIB IP Route Table page C 40 To modify a route change fields in the desired entry of the routing table indexed by ipRouteDest To add a route specify values for a table entry for which the index ipRouteDest does not already exist The following objects must be specified ipRouteDest joRouteEntry 1 Serves as an index to the routing table Only one route per destination can appear in the table To ensure that no duplicate destinations appear in the routing table the ipRouteDest object will be treated as described in the IP Forwarding Table MIB RFC 1354 m ipRoutelflndex When setting this object via SNMP the ipRoutelflndex value of ifindex defined for a particular device type August 1997 C 13 MIB Descriptions C 14 Object Description Setting Contents ipRouteTable Objects to be set t
166. e link layer COM port connected to an external LAN adapter for Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity for Telnet or SNMP management Remote management is accomplished via the following methods Merging or multiplexing management data with user data and transferring the information over a specified network PVC Dedicated frame relay PVC between access units at each end of the circuit for in band management Management PVCs configured between DTE ports and RFC 1490 compliant routers at each end of the circuit to route management and user data through the same port to the routers External modems connected to access unit COM port and the NMS for out of band management Router connected to the access unit s COM port for out of band management Refer to Chapter 2 Management Control and IP Addressing for additional information August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit You can reset the FrameSaver access unit in four ways Reset it from the Control menu to perform a self test Cycle the power to perform a self test Reset the configuration options to re establish connectivity with the user interface m Set the MIB from NMS Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a power on selftest of the unit recycling power gt Procedure To reset the FrameSaver access unit from the Control menu 1 From the Main Menu scre
167. e screen function key area 7 To save changes select Save and press Return The Save Configuration To screen appears Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Manual Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs Configure the external device connected the the FrameSaver access unit s COM port Then use the COM Port Call Setup screen to Select the desired telephone number Dial a call Disconnect a call gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Control gt COM Port Call Setup 2 Enter the desired directory number or press the spacebar to cycle through the numbers that have been set up in the directory The telephone number appears in the Directory Phone Number field See Maintaining COM Port Directories and ISDN Call Profiles on page 5 7 for information about the call directory 3 Select Dial and press the Enter key to initiate dialing 4 To end the call select Disconnect and press the Enter key Supported SNMP Traps 9621 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver access unit supports the following traps warm start authentication failure enterprise specific those specific to this access unit link up link down Refer to Appendix D for more information on traps August 1997 5 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Selecting SNMP Traps Select the SNMP traps you want to send
168. e shows how the FrameSaver access unit is used as a limited frame relay switch DTEs ___DLCI50 _ z DLCI60 _ x Access Unit Port 1 i ee Frame Relay Network Network Side User Side of LMI of LMI Physical Connection PVC Connection 97 14990a The following table provides an example using the DLCls shown above illustrating how DLCI connections are configured Source Interface Source DLCI Destination Interface Destination DLCI Port 1 DLCI 50 Network NET DLCI 201 Port 1 DLCI 60 Port 2 DLCI 70 This example shows DLCls coming in over each DTE port For each port you configure each DLCI that is you configure a separate PVC connection for each in coming DLCI Menu selection sequences Main Menu Configuration PVC Connections New or Main Menu Configuration Ports DLC Records New 3 6 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications Using Configuration Shortcuts When the FR frame relay Discovery feature is used DLCI configuration and PVC connection occur automatically when the network interface is configured as the user side of LMI the usual configuration The FrameSaver access unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message Network and Port interface DLCls are created automatically to correspond with DLCls discovered from the network and the access unit connects them All automatically configured DLCls are multipl
169. e to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Paradyne A WARNING To Users of Digital Apparatus in Canada This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference causing equipment regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du r glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 B Important Regulatory Information Important Safety Instructions 10 Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual The power supply for this product is intended to be used with a 3 wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a 3 wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openin
170. e will be created for management and Port 1 data DLCls will be multiplexed August 1997 4 17 Setting Up Select FR Discovery mode If the access unit s application will be 2MPorts Both Port 1 and Port 2 will be used Compression will not be enabled DLCls on the Network side will be created each containing EDLCIs for Port 1 data Port 2 data and management traffic 2MPorts Compr Both Port 1 and Port 2 will be used Compression will be enabled on Port 1 DLCls will be multiplexed NetOnly A multiplexed DLCI will be created on the Network side No port or management DLCls or PVC connections will be created Disable No port or management DLCls or PVC connections will be created No frame relay discovery takes place Access unit will be configured manually 3 Save your selection 4 Go to the Configuration menu and change any node specific configuration options that may be needed 4 18 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up The following table indicates the automatic configuration that occurs within the FrameSaver access unit when a frame relay discovery mode is selected Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 1 of 6 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is No Management Network DLC Records 1Port DLC Number is automatically created from the LMI status response message 1Po
171. eature also supports manual call control Refer to Manual Dial Backup in Chapter 5 for manual calling procedures NOTE If upgrading a FrameSaver access unit with an ISDN BRI DBM you need software revision 2 0 or greater Contact your sales or service representative if you need to upgrade your software August 1997 1 15 About the FrameSaver 9620 Backup Philosophies Backup in the access unit is based upon two basic concepts Concept of an alternate destination By defining an alternate or backup path for data data can be switched to the alternate destination path when the primary destination connection fails This concept allows an alternate circuit or path to be defined for each primary destination circuit Configuring a backup link DLCI and possibly a multiplexed DLC EDLCI specifies this circuit The circuit can be on the same physical port as the primary destination circuit or it can be on a different port Concept that automatic backup is better Using the automatic backup feature immediately puts the unit into backup as soon as a network LMI or PVC failure is detected A failure of the physical link between the access unit and the network or an external device can also initiate backup This feature allows the unit to switch data to the backup path without operator intervention or the delay of waiting for the LMI to time out A failure of the physical connection that will cause automatic backup to occur includes
172. ecord number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Alternate Destination Profile Possible Settings ASCII text Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination ISDN profile associated with the remote unit Those ISDN profile IDs that you defined using Main Menu Control gt ISDN Call Profiles will be available for selection Profiles are identified by number This configuration option only appears when Alternate Destination Link is set to BRI and an ISDN Call Profile has been defined August 1997 4 49 Setting Up Setting Test Timeout and Duration Options Select General to display or change the general configuration options Use the General Options screen see Table 4 8 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration General Table 4 8 General Options Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not user initiated loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated Enable User initiated Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the access unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the access unit is accidently commanded to execute a test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests mu
173. ected by the access unit COM port Configured data rate for the port Data ports Configured data rate for the port BRI B channels Currently negotiated data rate for the B channel if a call has been established 0 if one has not m Service side of UNI Peak data rate available based on physical sublayer network data port or B channel DTE side of UNI Peak data rate available based on physical sublayer network data port or B channel ifAdminStatus ifEntry 7 Only for data ports and frame relay logical link sublayers It is read only for the COM port and network interface Enables or disables the interface m up 1 Enables the interface down 2 Disables the interface August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Object Description Setting Contents ifOperStatus Specifies the current ifEntry 8 operational state of the interface State of Interface m DDS network interface up 1 No alarms down 2 Alarm is active testing 3 Test is active COM port up 1 Always up unless When configured as a configured as a network communication link up or communication link down is based on state of link layer protocol and control leads down 2 No alarms in link layer protocol testing 3 Never in a test state Data ports up 1 If the DTE supports DTR DTR is on for the port If the DTE does not supp
174. ed EDLCls provides a way of multiplexing management data with customer data so that no additional PVCs are required P Internet Protocol Connectivity Supports connectivity within an IP network for up to 300 IP host and or network routes and provides IP routing for SNMP Telnet and file transfer protocol FTP message connectivity without requiring direct connections Alarm and Fault Condition Indication Provides the capability to attach a terminal or printer to display or print alarm messages Alarms or traps generated include crossed pair connection no signal out of service out of frame excessive bipolar violations logical link or DLCI is down up frame relay DLCI is down up compression connection is down low compression ratio and DBM and ISDN network failure Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to diagnose device network and PVC problems Diagnostic tests that can be selected include Physical Tests for an interface Network Port 1 or Port 2 PVC Tests for an interface Network Port 1 Port 2 or BRI B1 Loopbacks for an interface include network CSU and DSU external DTE initiated PVC and PVC connectivity loopbacks Pattern Tests for an interface include 511 and 55 hexadecimal test patterns Self test Lamp test SNMP MIB Management Information Base Object Test Commands Supports the same testing capability as the user interface 9621 A2 GH30 00 Aug
175. een appears Choose a configuration option area to save to e g Customer Configuration 1 NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations such as SNMP DDS autobaud and auto configuration If the configuration that you have just loaded is changed via one of these other methods then saving your configuration would cause the configuration change from the other method to be lost A warning message is displayed if you attempt to save your configuration over a configuration changed by another method 4 12 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Using Configuration Shortcuts 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration shortcuts allow you to force a set of configuration options that are appropriate to how the FrameSaver access unit will be configured or used The access unit provides the following automatic configuration features Configuration templates To set up an application for the FrameSaver access unit during initial setup Templates are for the most common applications of a FrameSaver access unit When a template is selected the DTE ports are enabled or disabled Compression is enabled if a compression template is selected and the Port and Link Status configuration options are enabled Then only the appropriate sets of configuration options are visible for configuration Frame relay discovery To select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver access unit When
176. election Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication General SNMP Management The General SNMP Management Options screen appears August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins 4 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Enable SNMP management for the access unit SNMP Management to Enable Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed for the SNMP community names Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read or Read Write Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area To save changes select Save and press Return Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information about SNMP configuration options Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 9621 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver access unit provides an additional level of security by The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that Limiting the IP addresses of the NMSs that can access the FrameSaver access unit Performing validation check
177. emplate when setting up then select the 1Port template the 1Port selection disables Port 2 although other settings configured for Port 2 remain unchanged gt Procedure To select an application template 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Shortcuts Config Template 2 Select a template that indicates how the access unit will be used Config Template Application Setup Configuration 1Port Only Port 1 will be used and the data compression feature will not be used Port 1 set to Enable and Port 2 set to Disable Compression set to Disable Frame Relay Link Status set to Enable for both Port 1 and Network interfaces 1Port Compr Only Port 1 will be used and the data compression feature will be used Port 1 set to Enable and Port 2 set to Disable Compression set to Enable Frame Relay Link Status set to Enable for both Port 1 and Network interfaces 2Ports Both ports will be used and the data compression feature will not be used m Both Port 1 and Port 2 set to Enable Compression set to Disable Frame Relay Link Status set to Enable for Port 1 Port 2 and Network interfaces 2Ports Compr Both ports will be used and the data compression feature will be used m Both Port 1 and Port 2 set to Enable Compression set to Enable Frame Relay Link Status set to Enable for Port 1 Port 2 and Network interfaces
178. en select Control and press Return The Control menu appears 2 Select Reset Device and press Return The FrameSaver access unit reinitializes itself performing a device self test Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit via Power Recycling Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the access unit NOTE Make sure that the async terminal has Flow Control set to None for recycling to take place 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 15 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Resetting the Access Unit s COM Port or Factory Defaults 5 16 Misconfiguring the FrameSaver access unit could render the user interface inaccessible leaving it in a state where a session cannot be started via the COM port or a Telnet session If this occurs access unit connectivity can be restored via a directly connected terminal Two methods can be used to restore access to the user interface Reset COM Port Allows you to reset the configuration options related to COM port usage This also causes a device reset where the FrameSaver access unit performs a Device Self Test No security related configuration options are changed Reload Factory Defaults Allows you to reload the Default Factory Configuration resetting all of the configuration and control settings which causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a device reset This method is also useful when the user s password s have been forgotten gt Procedure To reset COM por
179. ents on the DDS network interface and the synchronous data ports DLCI Traps on Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports DBM All Default Setting All Specifies which interface will monitor and generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are not supported on the COM port Network Generates trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events on DLCls for the network interface only Ports Generates trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events on DLCls for the synchronous data ports only DBM Generates trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events on DLCls for the DBM only All Generates trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events on DLCls for the DDS network interface and synchronous data ports 4 76 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Configuring Auto Backup Select Auto Backup Criteria to change or display the configuration option that determines whether automatic backup is allowed Main Menu gt Configuration Auto Backup Criteria See Table 4 18 for Auto Backup Criteria configuration options Table 4 18 Auto Backup Criteria Options Auto Backup Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether backup for the access unit is automatically performed when the primary physical link or LMI or a DLCI on a PVC connection fails When enabled the access unit automatically enables the Alternate Link configuratio
180. er access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents frLportNumPlan frLportrEntry 1 Identifies the network address number plan for the UNI NNI logical port Supports only the following value m none 4 The SNMP agent will return an octet string of zero length for the ifPhysAddress frLportContact frLportEntry 2 Identifies the network contact for this UNI port The access unit does not support a different contact per interface The value for this object is the information contained in the System Contact object of MIB II frLportLocation frLportrEntry 3 Identifies the frame relay network location for this UNI frame relay interface The access unit does not support a different location per interface The value for this object is the information contained in the System Location object of MIB II frLportType frLportrEntry 4 Identifies the type of network interface for this frame relay interface Since this access unit does not support a network to network interface NNI only the following value is supported m uni 1 The frame relay interface supports the service side of the user to network interface UNI frLportAddrDLCl Len frLportrEntry 5 Identifies the Q 922 address field length and the DLCI length for this frame relay interface Supports only the following value twoOctets10Bits 1 The frame relay address field length is
181. es are discarded For traps when COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use set to Net Link up to 10 SNMP trap messages are held at the COM port interface Enable Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu s COM Port Call Directories Directory Number A alarm Disable For alarms does not hold messages For traps where a COM port connected external device has not completed the connection holds the messages Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the COM port external device connection disconnects after the SNMP trap message has been sent This configuration option only applies to external device connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message Enable Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message Disable Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This enables the NMS to poll the access unit for more information after receiving SNMP traps 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 61 Setting Up Table 4 12 Alarm Options 2 of 2 Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether an incomplete call busy no answer etc is retried when an alarm or SNMP trap message is sent to the COM port connected external device Enable Attempts to retry the call up
182. ess unit backing up to a neighboring access unit both equipped with an ISDN BRI DBM using the Auto Backup feature In this example the central site is equipped with an ISDN BRI DBM but the DBM is not necessary for this application Access Unit with Central Regional Backu Network Access Site P Relay Unit with Unit with Router DBM DBM Physical Connection PVC Connection 97 15397 01 Backup Connection Extra CIR for network DLCIs and or additional network DLCIs must be provisioned with by the network provider to implement this application m f multiplexed DLCIs are used increase CIR for the network DLCIs between the regional and central sites to allow for the additional backup traffic DLCIs plus the EDLCls f multiplexed DLCls are not used additional network DLCls between the regional and central sites the regional units DLCls plus the remote unit s DLCls must be provisioned for use during backup August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications The following table shows how these access units should be configured when using ISDN BRI DBMs for backup It assumes the ISDN BRI DBM physical frame relay DLCI records and ISDN Call Profiles have been set up Refer to the Setting Up an ISDN BRI DBM section of Chapter 4 Setting Up for additional information Remote Access Unit with ISDN BRI DBM Regional Access Unit with ISDN BRI DBM Central Sit
183. exed When management PVCs are multiplexed with data two or three DLCls are created from the network DLCI one or two matching DLCls for data one per port and another for management Mgm information If the unit at the other end of the network PVC is not a FrameSaver access unit 9x2x models FR Discovery mode should be set to NetOnly 1 Port or Disable only one port can be used and no management DLCls can be created In addition PVC diagnostic tests cannot be run without disrupting data This is because only FrameSaver models currently support port and PVC multiplexing and PVC diagnostics Using an example similar to the previous illustration the following shows the DLCI records and PVC connections created when a frame relay discovery method is selected The tables illustrate the automatic configuration that takes place within the access unit Refer to Using Configuration Shortcuts in Chapter 4 for additional information This example shows the 1 port management application 1MPort Access Unit DTE Cl DLCI 201 Pa _ 7 Mgm201 DLC 201 Frame lt Z Relay Port 1 NET Port Network J Network Side User Side Contains 2 EDLCIs of LMI of LMI Port 1 Physical Connection Management Mgm PVC Connection 97 15399 Primary Primary Primary FR Discovery Source Source Destination Destination Destination Selection Interface DLCI Interface DLCI EDLCI One port with P
184. face Only supported for the data ports m testMon511 iffestType 4 Starts a Monitor 511 test on the interface Only supported for the data ports m testSend511 iflestType 6 Starts a Send 511 test on the interface Only supported for the data ports August 1997 C 11 MIB Descriptions Object Description Setting Contents iffestCode iffestEntry 5 Contains a code which is more specific about the test results Supports the following values m none iffestCode 1 No further information is available Used for send pattern code and loopback tests m inSyncNoBitErrors ifTestCode 2 A 511 monitor pattern test has synchronized on the pattern and has not detected any bit errors m inSyncWithBitErrors iffestCode 3 A 511 monitor pattern test has synchronized on the pattern and has detected bit errors m notlnSync iffestCode 4 A 511 monitor test pattern has not synchronized on the requested pattern iffestOwner iffestEntry 6 Used by an SNMP Manager to identify the current owner of the test for the interface The SNMP Manager sets the object to its IP address when setting ifTestID and iffestStatus Generic Receive Address Table Not supported by the FrameSaver access unit The IP Group objects are supported by the access unit for all data paths that are currently configured to carry IP data to from the access unit including the PVCs Al
185. figured If Compression is manually disabled for one of the 6 DLCls the next new DLCI created will have Compression enabled August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 5 of 6 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is Multiplexed Management cont d 2MPorts 2MPorts Compr cont d Management PVCs 2 Name is automatically created from the network DLCI as Mgmnnnn nnnn being the discovered multiplexed network DLCI number 2 Example Network DLCI 1001 gt Port 1 DLCI 1001 and Port 2 DLCI 1001 and Mgm1001 IP Address is taken from the Node IP Address 2 Subnet Address is taken from the Node Subnet Address 2 Primary Destination Link is set to Network Primary Destination DLCI is automatically created from the network DLCI Three Primary Destination EDLCls are automatically created Port 1 data is always EDLCI 0 Port 2 data is always EDLCI 1 Management data is always EDLCI 2 Set DE set to Enable RIP set to Proprietary PVC Connections Source Link is set to Port 2 Source DLCI is taken from the Port 1 DLCI Number Source EDLCI is blank Primary Destination Link is set to Network Primary Destination DLCI is taken from the network DLCI Number Three Primary Destination EDLCls are automatically created Port 1 da
186. g 3 Configures the N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before reporting an error Applies to both the user and network sides of the UNI LMI Error Event N2 does not appear if LMI Personality is set to None Compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous 1 10 Specifies the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link inclusive LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of the UNI LMI Clearing Event N3 does not appear if LMI Personality is set to None Compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous 1 10 Specifies the number of error free messages that must be received inclusive August 1997 4 39 Setting Up Table 4 5 Frame Relay Options 4 of 5 LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies only to the user side of the UNI LMI Status Enquiry N1 does not appear if LMI Personality is set to None Compression is en
187. g Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the access unit recognizes a failure in one of the communication interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the access unit recognizes one of its communication interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 75 Setting Up Table 4 17 SNMP Traps Options 3 of 3 Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports DBM All Default Setting All Specifies which interface monitors and generates linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM port Network Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the DDS network interface Ports Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the synchronous data ports DBM Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the DBM only All Generates trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific ev
188. g this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Network DLC Records gt DLCI Status Inactive Disable frame relay Link Status on the network s Primary Destination channels following this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Network gt Frame Relay gt Link Status Disable Enable frame relay Link Status on the answering side of the ISDN B channel then on the originating side following this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN BRI DBM gt Frame Relay gt Link Status Enable Make sure the ISDN Call Profiles are correct and enabled To determine the answering or originating side see Originate or Answer in the DBM s physical options 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 11 Troubleshooting and Maintenance B gt Procedure 1 Configure the ISDN BRI DBM or external backup device s interface including PVC connections with an alternate destination specified 2 Set up ISDN Call Profiles if using an ISDN BRI DBM or the phone number in an external backup device If using an Then select ISDN BRI DBM ISDN Call Profiles Main Menu gt Control ISDN Call Profiles ISDN Call Profile Status Destination Called ID m Calling ID 1 m Calling ID 2 External backup device Call Directories Main Menu gt Control Call Setup Directory Number Directory Phone Number 3 Disable The LMI for the Primary Desti
189. ge Value Out of Range 16 1007 DLCI Number does not appear if the DLC number is part of a connection or has not been created yet NOTES Ifa DLCl number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the access unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive DLCI Status Possible Settings Active Inactive Default Setting Active Configures the DLCI to transfer information over the frame relay interface Active The DLCI is active and can be used for the transfer of information on the frame relay interface Inactive The DLCI is inactive and cannot be used for the transfer of information on the frame relay interface Discards any frames received on this DLCI NOTE Setting this configuration option to Inactive causes the access unit to abort any active frame relay tests DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed Default Setting Standard Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed DLCI Type does not appear if Compression is enabled and the DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multip
190. gement PVCs Print or photocopy this worksheet as many times as needed Each ID PVC number item in the worksheet includes an area for the PVC option and setting as well as the Primary and Alternate PVC option and setting Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs gt New or Modify Device Name Refer to Management PVC Options Table 4 14 Field PVC ID PVC ID PVC ID PVC ID PVC ID Name Interface IP Address 000 000 000 000 Interface Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 1 Primary Link Network Network Network Network Network Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 BRI B1 BRI B1 BRI B1 BRI B1 BRI B1 Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Primary DLCI Primary EDLCI Alternate Link Alternate DLCI Alternate EDLCI Alternate Profile 2 Set DE Enable Disable RIP 3 None None None None None Prop Prop Prop Prop Prop 1 The periods between each set of three digits are considered part of the address field but are not entered 2 See the ISDN Call Profile on the Control menu 3 None is the default for Ports 1 and 2 Proprietary is the default for network interface B 14 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Worksheets General SNMP Management Options Worksheet Use this worksheet to record the necessary information needed to allow the access u
191. gher Provides the index that m For layer corresponding to Layer corresponds to the higher physical interface network data ifStackEntry1 sublevel specified by ports or BRI channels Set ifStackLowerLayer ifStackHigherLayer to the iflndex of the corresponding frame relay service side logical link sublayer For layer corresponding to logical interface frame relay DTE or service side of the logical link sublayer set ifStackHigherLayer to zero there is no higher interface ifStackLower Provides the index that For layer corresponding to Layer corresponds to the lower physical interface Set ifStackEntry2 sublevel specified by ifStackLowerLayer to zero there ifStackHigherLayer is no lower interface For layer corresponding to logical interface Set ifStackLowerLayer to the iflndex of the corresponding physical interface network or data port ifStackStatus Specifies the stack group s When ifStackStatus set to active ifStackEntry3 status compared to the maps to ifOperStatus set to interface s ifOperStatus of the Higher Layer object frame relay DTE or service side logical link sublayer Supported as a read only variable up 1 or testing 3 When ifStackStatus set to not in service maps to ifOperStatus set to down 2 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Interface Test Table 9621 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver access unit uses the Interface Test table
192. gnments COM Port to LAN Cable 3100 F2 910 The adapter is ordered along with the appropriate cable Be sure to specify whether you need a Token Ring or an Ethernet cable shipped with the adapter also specify that the interface connecting with the access unit must be unkeyed The following shows the pin assignments for the cable between the LAN Adapter LAN A and the access unit s COM port or COM Port to PC Adapter Ben LANA Tx Clock 1 1 Unused Rx Data 2 2 DTR Signal Ground 3 3 Tx Data Tx Data 4 lt 4 Signal Ground DTR 5 eae 5 Rx Data CD 6 6 CTS RTS 7 PE 7 Frame Ground Rx Clock 8 8 Unused 496 14908 Modular RJ48S Network Cable Network access is via a 14 foot modular cable with an RJ48S keyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Pin Number Transmit ring to the local loop R 1 Transmit tip to the local loop T 2 Receive tip from the local loop T1 7 Receive ring from the local loop R1 8 Gender Adapter Changer When connecting the COM port to a router or Frame Relay Assembler Disassembler FRAD a gender adapter is required to convert the COM Port to Terminal Printer cable s plug type interface to a socket type interface for the AUX port 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 E 3 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Modular RJ45 ISDN U Backup Interface
193. gs must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products This product contains a coin cell lithium battery that is only to be replaced at the factory Caution There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same type Dispose of used batteries accor
194. gtVCSigUserN392 frMgtVCSigEntry 3 m frMgtVCSigUserN393 frMgtVCSigEntry 4 m frMgtVCSigUserT391 frMgtVCSigEntry 5 Service Side LMI Parameters Identify the service side protocol parameters that control the operation of the LMI link for the frame relay interface The values of the objects are m frMgtVCSigNetN392 frMgtVCSigEntry 6 LMI Error Event N2 configuration option m frMgtVCSigNetN393 frMgtVCSigEntry 7 LMI Clearing Events N3 configuration option m frMgtVCSigNetT392 frMgtVCSigEntry 8 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 configuration option m frMgtVCSigNetnN4 frMgtVCSigEntry 9 LMI Max Network Status Enquiries N4 configuration option m frMgtVCSignetT3 frMgtVCSigEntry 10 LMI N4 measurement Period T3 configuration option C 24 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Object Description Setting Contents DTE Side Error Statistics Do not support DTE side error statistics since this MIB is only supported for service side LMI The value of the following MIB objects is equal to NoSuchName m frMgtVCSigUserLinkRelErrors frMgtVCSigEntry 11 m frMgtVCSigUserprotErrors frMgtVCSigEntry 12 m frMgtVCSigUserChanInactive frMgtVCSigEntry 13 Service Side Error Statistics Contain the error statistics for a particular circuit These statistics are kept since the last Statistics Clear command has
195. h access units so their Compression configuration options are compatible Low Compression Ratio Alarm Status or Trap Compression Ratio Alarm Threshold setting is not realistic given the compression capability of the data content Increase the Alarm Threshold configuration option setting then verify that a realistic alarm threshold is chosen There is a high percentage of short packets with Short Packet Bypass enabled Raise the Alarm Threshold configuration option setting then disable Short Packet Bypass NOTE Disabling Short Packet Bypass may decrease performance Low Throughput for PVC Compression Flow Control method is incompatible with the DTE Select a flow control method that is compatible with the DTE Selecting the Clock setting yields the best throughput There is insufficient port clock rate Increase the communication port s speed using the Port Rate Kbps configuration option setting There is a high error rate across the PVC The network is discarding packets due to an excessive burst rate Correct the source of the errors or increase the CIR bps setting Make sure that the Inbound and Outbound CIR Enforcement Modes are compatible with burst rates 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 21 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Frame Relay PVC Problems 5 22 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No receipt or transmission of dat
196. h its own network Either way the ISDN BRI DBM supports a variety of backup schemes The access unit itself supports various LMI types provides switching capability and performs continuous monitoring of the frame relay physical and logical link s condition Combined with the ISDN BRI DBM s capabilities better faster and easier backup can be achieved than when relying upon a router for backup Refer to About Backup in Chapter 1 for information about the philosophies behind development of the backup feature and for additional information about using an internal ISDN BRI DBM or an external backup device Setting Up in Chapter 4 for assistance configuring the backup feature Backup Security in Chapter 6 for information about the security provided data over the alternate backup path August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications Backing Up to the Primary Destination Node 9621 A2 GH30 00 Many times it is desirable to backup to the ultimate destination node directly using an alternate network like ISDN or POTS plain old telephone service This method allows the FrameSaver access units to bypass network problems completely and gives the operator more control The FrameSaver access unit provides the features to achieve this goal Regeneration of LMI When the access units are configured so that one end of the circuit is set to the network side and the other is set to the user side of LMI on the alternate de
197. he ASCII alarms to receive for each interface Set up the COM Port Call Directories Enable Alarm amp Trap Dial Out Enable Call Retry if desired gt Procedure To enable selected ASCII alarms for each interface 1 Follow this menu sequence to display the Load Configuration From screen Main Menu gt Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return The Configuration Edit Display screen appears 3 Select the ASCII alarms to enable for the interface To enable Set the configuration option s Network interface alarms Configuration Network Interface gt Physical Data Ports alarms Configuration Data Ports Physical Frame Relay DLCI alarms Configuration nterface Frame Relay and Configuration nterface gt DLCI 4 Configure the phone directory to use for dialing out alarms see Displaying or Changing COM Port Directory Numbers on page 5 8 5 Select Alarm from the Configuration Edit Display menu and press Return 5 4 The Alarms Options screen appears To Set the configuration option Automatically initiate a call dial out Alarm amp Trap Dial Out to Enable Retry the call if the call cannot be completed Call Retry to Enable Enable ASCII alarms Configuration Alarm Options August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 6 Press Ctrl a to switch to th
198. he DTE as the source Device Tests The FrameSaver access unit supports a Lamp Test at the device level Lamp Test Use this non disruptive test to determine whether all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When you stop the test the LEDs are restored to their normal condition If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Setting General Options in Chapter 4 to configure the unit to automatically end the test 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 33 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Test Timeout Latching Loopback 5 34 A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver access unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Setting General Options in Chapter 4 NOTE These configuration options do not pe
199. he frame relay network and one for egress Supports only a single CIR for both directions so the following objects contain the same value which corresponds to the CIR configuration option m frPVCEndptlnCIR frPVCEnaptEntry 5 m frPVCEndptOutCIR frPVCEndptEntry 9 frPVCEndpt Identifies PVC endpoints as The value of this MIB object is Connect being one part of a PVC noSuchName Identifier connection This object is frPVCEndpt an index into the PVC Entry 10 Connection Table which is not supported by the access unit frPVCEndptRow Creates modifies and The value of this MIB object is Status deletes rows in the PVC noSuchName frPVCEndpt Connection Table These Entry 11 operations are not supported by the access unit frPVCEndptRevd Identifies the status Supports only the following value SigStatus received via the local frPVCEndpt in channel signaling none 4 Only choice available Entry 12 procedures for this PVC when network side procedures endpoint are being performed August 1997 C 27 MIB Descriptions Object Description Setting Contents Circuit Statistics Contain the statistics fora The MIB objects and their frPVCEndpt particular circuit These corresponding statistics are Entry 13 20 statistics are kept since the m frPVCEndptInFrames command has been issued frPVCEndptEntry 13 Frames by the user or since the Received statistic circuit was created
200. hysical tests run with other physical tests physical tests run with logical tests and logical tests run with other logical tests August 1997 5 23 Troubleshooting and Maintenance m The CSU and DSU loopbacks and 511 generation monitor test are supported on the DDS network interface The external DTE loopback and 511 pattern generation monitor are supported on the DTE ports Test Matrix 1 of 4 Test Category Physical and Physical Test Type Physical Local Loopbacks Pattern Tests Network Network Port 1 DTE Port 2 DTE Network Port 1 Port 2 Physical Test CSU DSU External External Send Send Send y Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Monitor 511 Monitor 511 Monitor 511 Local CSU N N Y Y N N N Loopbacks Loopback DSU N N Y Y N N N Loopback Port 1 Y Y N Y Y Y Y DTE External Loopback Port 2 Y Y Y N Y Y Y DTE External Loopback Pattern Network N N Y Y yi1 Y Y Tests Send Monitor 511 Port 1 Y Y N Y Y y1 Y Send Monitor 511 Port 2 Y Y Y N Y Y y1 Send Monitor 511 1 As long as one end of the circuit is sending and the other end is monitoring the pattern You cannot send or monitor two patterns Coordinate with your service provider when running physical tests Most end to end physical tests do not work on a frame relay network 5 24 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Test Matrix 2 of 4 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
201. if a clear m frPVCEndptOutFrames has never been issued frPVCEndptEntry 14 Frames Sent statistic m frPVCEndptInOctets frPVCEndptEntry 19 Characters Received statistic m frPVCEndptOutOctets frPVCEndptEntry 20 Characters Sent statistic last Statistics Clear Supported MIB objects that do not have corresponding statistics are m frPVCEndptInExcessFrames frPVCEndptEntry 16 m frPVCEndptOutExcess Frames frPVCEndptEntry 17 MIB objects not supported and that return a zero value are m frPVCEndptInDEFrames frPVCEndptEntry 15 m frPVCEndpitlnDiscards ffPVCEnaptEntry 18 PVC Connection Group The Frame Relay PVC Connection Status Change trap frPVCConnectStatusChange is not supported C 28 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 Supported for all of the synchronous data ports and for the COM port RFC 1659 is an SNMPve2 MIB but is converted to an SNMPv1 MIB to support this access unit One object five tables and one group are supported for this MIB Number of RS 232 Like Ports m General Port Table MIB Descriptions m Asynchronous Port Table Not supported for the synchronous data ports m Synchronous Port Table m Input Signal Table Not supported for the COM port Output Signal Table Not supported for the COM port Conformance Group Not supported Number of RS 232 Like Ports General Port Table 9621 A2 GH30 00 Supported a
202. iguration Option Setting Default in Bold Port Use Terminal Net Link Alarm Port Type Asynchronous Synchronous Data Rate Kbps 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 Clock Source Internal External RIP None Proprietary Character Length 7 8 Parity None Even Odd Stop Bits 1 1 5 2 Ignore Control Leads Disable DTR Login Required Enable Disable Port Access Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Inactivity Timeout Enable Disable Disconnect Time Minutes 1 60 5 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 External Device Options Worksheet Configuration Worksheets Use this worksheet to record configuration option settings for an external device that is connected to the access unit s COM port Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface External Device COM Port Device Name Refer to External Device COM Port Options Table 4 10 Configuration Option Default in Bold External Device Commands Disable AT Other Dial In Access Enable Disable Connect Prefix Connect Indication String Escape Sequence Escape Sequence Delay Sec None 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 Disconnect String COM Port Call Setup Worksheet 9621 A2 GH30 00 Use this worksheet to set up COM port call directories Main Menu gt Control COM Port Call Directories Devic
203. inal or other VT100 compatible interface can be directly connected to the COM port as well Customer Data DCE DTE Access Frame Relay lt Port Port Unii er Router or a 7 7 Lj WAN Link Relay Terminal Server AUX COM NET a Non RFC 1490 Port Port Por Management Data Physical Connection 1 PVC PVC Connection e 2 Cables 1 for Management Data 1 for Customer Data 97 14992 02 The configuration options below show what should be configured using a separate out of band management link These configuration options are configured from the user interface based upon the Port Type selected Asynchronous or Synchronous Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration User Interface Communication Port Port Use Set to Terminal and Port Use Set to Net Link and Port Type Set to Asynchronous Port Type Set to Synchronous Data Rate Kbps Clock Character Length Data Rate Kbps Parity Stop Bits Ignore Control Leads RIP See Table 4 9 in Chapter 4 Setting Up 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 2 3 Management Control and IP Addressing When the communication COM port is configured as the IP management link the async terminal interface is accessible through Telnet When this is the case you also need to enable Telnet and FTP Sessions configuration options Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration User Interface Telnet and FTP Sessions See Table 4 1
204. ing Node 00e cece eeee 3 14 4 Setting Up Considerations When Setting Up 22 2 0 c cece eee 4 1 Selecting a Management Interface 0 cece eee eee 4 2 Minimal Remote Configuration 0 02 e cece eee eee 4 2 m Recommended Order for Setup 0000 e eee e eee eee eens 4 3 E LOJE cists ee ode eae GRE Peas vo ee tee eee Sade vette 4 9 Entering Identity Information 0c cece eee eee ees 4 9 ii August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Contents Configuring the FrameSaver Access Unit 0000000e cease 4 9 Configuration Option Areas 0 0c cece eee eee 4 10 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 4 11 Changing Configuration Options cece eee eee 4 11 saving Configuration OpvonS coc cede cides rtan enia tds 4 12 Using Configuration Shortcuts creii einas cida nian ias 4 13 Selecting a Configuration Template 00 c eee eee eee 4 14 Setting Up Automatic DLCI Configuration and Connection 4 15 Configuring Physical Options for Each Interface 0 eee 4 24 Setting Up a Port Interface s Physical Options 4 25 Configuring Port 1 for Data Compression 0 0 eee eee 4 28 Setting Up the Network Interface s Physical Options 4 31 Setting Up the ISDN BRI DBM Interface s Physical Options 4 34 Configuring Frame Relay Options for Each Interface
205. inter or LAN E 2 modular RJ48S network V 35 DTE adapter Call Retry CC definition CCA definition IN 2 August 1997 CCITT definition CD a BT changing COM port directory numbers 5 8 configuration options ISDN call profiles channel defination Character Length CIR definition enforcement network CIR bps Circuit MIB group multiplexed PVCs multiplexing 3 3 3 4 GL 2 Clearing Event LMI existing information statistics 5 17 Clock Flow Control Invert Transmit Source Transmit CNIS definition GL 2 COM Port call setup worksheet COM port EEZ EE configuring an external device creating a separate management link pin assignments resetting to PC terminal printer or LAN cable worksheet Committed Information Rate CIR 4 44 CIR Enforcement Mode 4 38 Communication Port user interface options 4 51 protocol configuration option tables 4 63 worksheet B 13 Community Name 4 70 assigning 9621 A2 GH30 00 Compression 4 29 GL 2 application configuration worksheet B 4 Port 1 options 4 28 Ratio 1 13 Ratio Alarm 4 29 troubleshooting problems compression unit CU 9028 3 3 Configuration changing options 4 11 customer storage areas entering option definition GL 2 option areas 4 10 recording option settings saving options Shortcuts 3 4 B 4 GL 2 tables templates upload download worksheets
206. ion 2 The second of two alternate sets of configurations that can be set up by the customer and stored for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default configuration options You can load and edit the default factory configuration settings but you can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration until modified by the customer August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options To access and display the configuration options you must first load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area gt Procedure To load a configuration option set into the configuration edit area 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration 2 The Load Configuration From screen appears Select the configuration option area you want to load and press Return Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 or Customer Configuration 2 The selected configuration option set is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display screen appears Changing Configuration Options gt Procedure To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display screen select the configuration option set
207. ions L k simultaneously m 1 csuLoopbac It is used to view the status 2 dsuLoopback of currently running tests gw 8 nonLatchingCSULoopback m 16 nonLatchingDSULoopback m 32 sending511Pattern m 64 monitoring511 Pattern ddsTestStart A bitmap represented asa Supports only the following ddsTestEntry 3 sum which can represent conditions multiple conditions simultaneously m 1 csuLoopback It is used to start specific m 2 dsuLoopback tests m 16 send511 m 32 monitor511 ddsTestStop A bitmap represented asa Performing a get always yields 0 ddsTestEntry 4 ah sad a represent Supports only the following MUMP E GONGMONS conditions simultaneously 7 m 1 csuLoopback It is used to stop specific tests m 2 dsuLoopback m 4 send511 m 8 monitor511 ddsTestCode A read only code Supports the following conditions ddsTestEntry 5 containing more specific D N information concerning test m none ee tests ieee pattern monitoring results running or no further information is available m inSyncNoBitErrors 2 Monitor pattern test has synchronized without bit errors m inSyncWithBitErrors 3 Monitor pattern test has synchronized with bit errors m notinSync 4 Monitor pattern test has not synchronized ddsTestErrorCount Indicates the number of Value between 0 and 99 999 ddsTestEntry 6 errors detected while monitoring a pattern test August 1997 9621 A2 GH
208. it Specify the IP address es that identifies NMS n IP Address to the appropriate the SNMP manager s authorized to send IP address SNMP messages to the access unit Specify the access allowed for an Access Level to Read or Read Write authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area To save changes select Save and press Return Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information about SNMP configuration options August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins Creating a Login A login ID and password is required if security is enabled You can define a combination of six login passwords Each login must be unique and have a specified access level B gt Procedure To create a login ID and password 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Control gt Administer Logins 2 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 3 Select New and press Return 4 Enter the login password and security level information In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Pass
209. it A Frame _ z DLCI 60 Relay 7 Network Mm 9 Physical Connection PVC Connection Using Shared PVC FRAD 97 14995a By identifying DLCls carrying management data higher priority can be given to DLCls carrying customer data You can configure the management embedded DLCI EDLCI to set the DE discard eligible bit When the network encounters traffic congestion it discards data from the DLCls already marked discard eligible See Frame Relay Switching Application in Chapter 3 for a DLCI linking example August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Management Control and IP Addressing Transparent Management Control Using RFC 1490 Routers 9621 A2 GH30 00 The access unit can be managed locally via in band management channels using a frame relay PVC that is configured on a DTE port When managing the access unit remotely the access unit does not route IP traffic to the remote access unit Instead it is transparently passed through the access unit as part of customer data The router then forwards the management data back to the access unit on the dedicated management DLCI configured between the router and the DTE port of the access unit The configuration below shows both local and remote management across the network Management data is being routed from frame relay RFC 1490 IP Router A to RFC 1490 IP Router B then being redirected by the router to Access Unit B Both management and customer data are carried o
210. k Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 4 9 PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol Alternate IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate IP address for the communication COM port If this configuration option is not configured i e it is zero the COM port s primary IP address is used for the alternate telephone directory 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the COM port s alternate IP address which you can view or edit The first digit i e 777 255 255 255 can be any number from 001 through 223 excluding 127 Remaining digits i e 255 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears the alternate IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Alternate Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 4 9 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255
211. k check characters representing an entire block of data are generated and incorporated into a transmission frame then checked at the receiving end Canadian Standards Association Channel Service Unit The function of the access unit that protects the T1 line from damage and regenerates the T1 signal Clear to Send An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit CB ITU 106 an output signal DCE to DTE The elimination of empty fields redundancies and gaps in order to reduce storage capacity needs and the amount of data to be transmitted Anything that is compressed is restored after the data is received Dial Backup Module The optional internal ISDN BRI feature that provides automatic dial backup and service restoration of failed digital circuits Provides an ISDN U interface Data Communications Equipment The equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and end a connection It also provides the signal conversion required for communication between the DTE and the network A 16 Kbps ISDN channel that carries signaling information to control call setup which may carry packetized information as well August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 DDS DE decompression DLCI DOC DSR DSU DTE DTR EDLCI EIA encapsulated Enterprise MIB ESD excessive BPV FCC FECN 9621 A2 GH30 00 Glossary Digital Data Service such as DATAPHONE Digital Service or ACCUNET Spectrum of Digital Services that
212. k layer protocol used by IP A designated port DLCI and EDLCI for the primary data path from the data source so a PVC connection can be established The rules for timing format error control and flow control during data transmission Public Switched Telephone Network A network shared among many users who can use telephones to establish connections between two points Permanent Virtual Circuit This is the DSU s in band management channel that supports remote management via a Telnet connection It is the logical link identified by a DLCI used for routing frames over the network from their source to their destination A circuit that accepts data signals from a transmitter The standard of multiprotocol interconnect over frame relay This is the encapsulation method for carrying network interconnect traffic over a frame relay backbone it also covers both bridging and routing Routing Information Protocol Specifies the routing protocol used between access units August 1997 GL 5 Glossary router RTS RXC RXD SDC SDLC short packet SLIP SNMP status enquiry synchronous Telnet throughput transmitter TXC TXD UL UNI USOC Vac virtual circuit WAN GL 6 A device that makes decisions about the paths network traffic should take and forwards that traffic to its destination A router helps achieve interoperability and connectivity between different vendor s equipment regardless of p
213. l IP network through frame relay that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface Node IP Mask Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 4 13 Communication Protocol Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays for you enter the subnet mask for this unit s management PVC Primary Link Possible Settings Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI B1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLC with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Network Specifies the Network NET interface as the primary interface Port 1 or Port 2 Specifies the port as the primary interface BRI B1 Specifies the ISDN B channel 1 as the primary interface Clear Clears the source destination link and the DLCI field and suppresses the source destination EDLCI field NOTE Clearing Primary Link also clears Primary DLCI
214. l of the objects in the IP Group except for the IP Address Translation table are The following table provides clarification for objects contained in the IP group when it is not clear how the object definition in MIB II is supported by the access unit The IP Address Translation table ipNetToMediaTable does not apply and Description Setting Contents Specifies whether the access unit is acting as an IP gateway for forwarding of datagram received by but not addressed to the access unit Supports only the following value forwarding 1 The access unit is acting as a gateway The address table Supported IP Group fully supported will be empty Object ipForwarding ip 7 ipAddrTable ip 20 C 12 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions Object Description Setting Contents ipAdEntAddr ipAddrEntry 1 An IP address supported by the access unit which serves as an index to the address table Indexes for tables must be unique therefore only one iflndex can be displayed for each IP address supported by the device If the same IP address is configured for multiple interfaces or for default IP addresses the ipAddrTable will not display all of the interfaces that support a particular IP address ipAdEntlflndex If this object has a greater Index value that uniquely identifies ipAddrEntry 2 value than the ifNumber the applicabl
215. lay Cluster i aa 7 9120 DSX 1 Controller etwor 9028 Compression Frame Unit Relay Relay Cluster Controller Physical Connection 97 15395 PVC Connection August 1997 3 3 Typical Applications Data Compression Application 3 4 The application below shows the PVCs between two FrameSaver access units configured for data compression DTEs Access Frame Units E az l Relay mea Network Unit Compressed PVCs Uncompressed PVC FRF 9 Compliant Physical Connection Equipment PVC Connection 496 14897 The example shows a PVC coming from a non FRF 9 compliant device that is configured for non compression since the other vendor s equipment probably will not interoperate with the FrameSaver access unit See Configuring Port 1 for Data Compression in Chapter 4 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications Frame Relay Port Aggregation and Circuit Multiplexing Application The FrameSaver access unit allows two ports to share a single frame relay link which is called port aggregation Since only one physical network connection is required port charges are reduced In addition each port can be configured for different inbound and outbound CIR enforcement methods and each PVC on each port is configured for separate CIRs and burst rates When FrameSaver access units are at each end of the circuit the access unit also provides the ability to multiplex the
216. le DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver access units at both ends of the connection CIR bps Possible Settings 0 64 000 Default Setting 64 000 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 64000 0 64 000 bps Sets the network CIR inclusive 4 44 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 6 DLCI Records Options 2 of 2 Excess Burst Size Bits Possible Settings 0 999 999 Default Setting 0 Specifies the maximum amount of data that the network will accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames in bits Entry of an invalid size causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 999999 0 999 999 bits Specifies the amount of data that will accepted before frames are discarded inclusive DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for the DLCI also known as quality of service Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority DLCI Compression Possible Settings Enable
217. les in Chapter 5 for additional profile information see Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit for additional system reset information 4 82 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Verify the ISDN Lines Use either of the following methods to verify operation of the ISDN lines B gt Procedure 1 Check the status of the DBM interface Main Menu gt Status DBM Interface Status Line Status should display Active If an invalid Inv status appears e g Inv SPID in the Line Status field verify that you entered the SPID phone number and Called or Calling ID in the ISDN Call Profile correctly 2 Check the status of the FrameSaver access unit Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status gt Health and Status column DSU Operational should appear If ISDN Network Failed Idle appears check that both ends of the ISDN U cable are seated properly for a good physical connection If that does not clear the message verify that you entered the SPID and phone number and the ISDN Call Profile correctly See DBM Interface Status in Chapter 4 of the User s Guide for more DBM statuses and System and Test Status Messages for more information on Health and Status messages NOTE Reset the FrameSaver access unit to activate the revised numbers after correcting a SPID 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 83 Setting Up Modify the PVC Connection Being Backed Up B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Men
218. ltiplex DLCls that have been selected as one end of a connection An EDLCI is a number between 0 and 62 and it identifies the individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Electronic Industries Association This organization provides standards for the data communications industry to ensure uniformity of interface between DTEs and DCEs Protocol created control information that is added to the data or frame which has been broken into blocks or packets The DTE constructs control packets and encapsulates user data within those packets MIB objects unique to a company Electrostatic Discharge An undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage equipment and degrade electrical circuitry An excessive bipolar violation condition results when at least one invalid bipolar violation has occurred every 20 milliseconds for 2 seconds A Health and Status message under the Status branch menu is generated when this condition is detected Federal Communications Commission Board of Commissioners that regulates all U S interstate intrastate and foreign electrical communication systems that originate from the United States Forward Explicit Congestion Notification A bit set and forwarded by the network to notify users of data traffic congestion sent in the same direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator or bit Inbound frames may encounter congestion and be dropped Front End Processor A communications computer associated wi
219. me and specify an alternate directory if desired Follow this menu sequence to display the Load Configuration From screen Main Menu gt Configuration Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 Follow this menu sequence to initiate a call Configuration Edit Display gt Alarm The Alarm Options screen appears August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 8 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate 10 11 To Set the configuration option Automatically initiate a call dial out Alarm amp Trap Dial Out to Enable Retry the call if the call cannot be completed Call Retry to Enable Specify whether to disconnect immediately after dialing out traps or to allow a manual disconnect to occur A connection remains until manually disconnected Trap Disconnect to Enable Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area To save changes select Save and press Return Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Maintaining COM Port Directories and ISDN Call Profiles Three Control menu selections are dedicated to dialing a remote device for management or providing backup via an external modem or internal ISDN BRI DBM Select To COM Port Call Setup Select
220. menu driven interface to configure manage and maintain the access unit and access the extensive diagnostic capability locally or remotely The user interface is accessed using an async or other VT100 compatible terminal PC terminal emulation or Telnet session Interoperability with T1 Frame Relay Access Units Operates with the frame relay aware FRAW capability of a Model 9120 access unit Two Software Configurable Ports Provides configurability of ports for connection to either an ElIA 232 or V 35 DTE device Two Customer Specified Configuration Storage Areas Allows quick switching of the access unit s configuration Configuration Upload Download and Software Download Capability Provides quick cost effective software upgrades and quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes using a standard file transfer protocol FTP Security Provides multiple levels of security which prevents unauthorized access to the unit Security can be controlled by Disabling any form of access to the unit Requiring logins login ID password access level combinations with three access levels to select from read only limited access and full access Enabling SNMP management and specifying a community name and access level Read or Read Write Enabling SNMP management and specifying the IP addresses of only selected NMSs Ifthe ISDN BRI DBM option is installed specifying calling identifie
221. mit Clock An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit DB ITU 114 an output signal DCE to DTE Transmit Data An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit BA ITU 103 an input signal DTE to DCE Underwriter s Laboratories Inc An organization which promotes product safety User to Network Interface This is the frame relay interface located between the unit and the network Universal Service Ordering Codes Generic telephone company service ordering codes Volts alternating current A logical link connection or packet switching mechanism established between two devices at the start of transmission Wide Area Network A network that spans a large geographic area e g a country August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Index Numbers 511 test pattern 5 32 55 hexadecimal test pattern 5 30 A aborting tests 5 36 Access DDS to frame relay Dial In Name to user interface resetting restoring Access Level 4 72 assigning 6 6 Port co eS access unit confguina Lea managing troubleshooting problems 5 19 adapters adding DLCI records Address generic receive MIB table AdminLogin agent GL 1 aggregate seinor GEL aggregation application Alarm amp Trap Dial Out ASCII Compression Ratio 4 29 configuration option table 4 61 Connection Failure Cross Pair Detection DLCI Status Change Excessive BPV information LED is lit LMI Link Status Change No Signal options configura
222. n option and establishes an alternate DLCI and EDLCI rerouting traffic over the backup interface See Table 4 14 to configure the alternate DLCI and alternate EDLCI Enable Reroutes traffic over the backup alternate interface Disable Does not reroute traffic over the backup interface 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 77 Setting Up Restricting Auto Backup Based Upon the Time of Day An NMS can provide time of day automatic backup control since the FrameSaver access unit does not have an internal time of day clock The NMS switches configurations at the time of day automatic backup is allowed then switches again during the hours when it is not allowed gt Procedure 1 Configure for two sets of configuration options specifying different destination circuits following this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration gt PVC Connections 2 Store one configuration specifying only the primary destination circuit in the Customer Configuration 1 storage area PVC Connections Save Customer Configuration 1 3 Store an alternate configuration specifying both the primary and alternate destination circuits in the Customer Configuration 2 storage area PVC Connections Save Customer Configuration 2 4 Select a configuration from the NMS and save it If automatic backup is Then the NMS loads Allowed Customer Configuration 2 main conftig load devConfigAreaCopy gt customer2 to active
223. n DLCls Main Menu Configuration PVC Connections gt New PVC Connections Source Primary Destination Alternate Destination 5 13 Complete configuring management of the access unit if needed Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Protocol a Management PVCs General SNMP Management SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps 14 Configure alarm and SNMP trap notification Main Menu Configuration Alarm 15 Configure test timeout and duration Main Menu Configuration General 16 Set up logins if using security Main Menu Control Administer Logins New 17 Enter device identification information The device name appears at the top of each screen Main Menu gt Control Device Name 18 Configure for automatic backup Main Menu Configuration Auto Backup Criteria Auto Backup Enable 1 Not necessary if auto configuration is used and management access is through the frame relay network 5 An alternate destination must be specified for backup and must be configured after FR Discovery has occurred 6 Logins and screen setup can be created before or after setup and configuration of the access unit August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Menu Sequences 5 of 6 Setting Up Steps for Setup Menu Selection Sequence 19 Verify connections For the network and each data
224. n external backup device creating the backup link is a modem which is connected to one of the FrameSaver access unit s DTE ports The alternate path is through the PSTN public switched telephone network Frame Frame Relay Frame Relay Router P Relay DTE P Router g FR DTE Port Network ort FR Access Access Unit PVC Unit FR Frame Relay Physical Connection 2 PVC Connection 97 15391 Backup Connection This illustration of a FrameSaver access unit directly backing up to the final destination shows a network failure with backup being accomplished using the alternate networks ISDN or PSTN Frame Relay relay Network 9620 ROULET Access s Unit wit L DD N je x BRI pps ARI FR Frame Relay BRI MA R BRI BK Physical Connection e PVC Connection 97 15392 01 Backup Connection 3 12 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Typical Applications The following table shows how these access units should be configured when using ISDN BRI DBMs for backup It assumes the ISDN BRI DBM physical frame relay DLCI records and ISDN Call Profiles have been set up Refer to the Setting Up an ISDN BRI DBM section of Chapter 4 Setting Up for additional information Remote Access Unit Primary Destination Access Unit with ISDN BRI DBM with ISDN BRI DBM ISDN BRI DBM s B Channel Physical Options Table 4 4 BRI B1 set
225. nagement control Management Control Using a Dedicated DLCI The DLCI is the local network address of a PVC link The DLCI at the source of a link and the DLCI at the destination of the link along with all the DLCls inside the network make up the path that is the PVC that is the PVC links DLCls at each end of the link There are two configured PVCs through the network One for management data m One for customer data Access UnitA Access Unit B Physical Connection PVC Connection Using Dedicated PVC 496 14994 Frame Relay Network As shown in the example in band management is accomplished through the dedicated PVC between the two access units Management data for Access Unit B goes to Access Unit A which then routes it into the dedicated PVC between the access units Only management data is carried over the PVC source DLCI 60 to destination DLCI 20 See Frame Relay Switching Application in Chapter 3 for a DLCI linking example 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 2 5 Management Control and IP Addressing Management Control Using Circuit Multiplexing EDLCI 2 6 In the configuration below the access unit s management data is multiplexed with customer data onto a single PVC sharing the same PVC source DLCI 20 to destination DLCI 60 This is the preferred method There is one configured PVC through the network Ashared PVC for management and customer data Access Unit B Access Un
226. nager Manager after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change This trap does not have a variable binding enterpriseDevice An internal device failure Operating software has detected Fail 3 an internal device failure enterpriseDLClInet UNIDown 11 The DLCI for an interface supporting the Service Side of the UNI is down DLCI is down enterpriseDLClInet The DLCI for an interface DLCI is up again CompressionRatio 10 dropped below the specified threshold UNIUp 12 supporting the Service Side of the UNI is up enterpriseLow The compression ratio has DLCI Compression Ratio Threshold for Port 1 was set too high enterpriseLow CompressionRatio Clear 110 The compression ratio has risen above the specified threshold DLCI Compression Ratio Threshold for Port 1 was set too low enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 A hardware failure The variable binding for this trap is devSelfTestResults Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected enterprise Test A test is running At least one test has been Start 5 started on an interface or virtual Circuit enterprise Test All tests have been halted All tests have been halted on an Stop 105 interface or virtual circuit August 1997 D 5 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps D 6 Tests that affect the enterpriseTestStart and enterpriseTestStop traps and variable bindings ar
227. nation Link the frame relay Link Status configuration option or The primary network DLCl s at both ends of the PVC connection in order to start dialing so the Alternate Destination DLCI s can be tested see the DLCI Status configuration option in the DLC Records Options Table 4 6 of Chapter 4 4 Verify that backup is taking place by viewing the LMI Reported DLCls screen of the backup port for LMI status Main Menu gt Status gt LMI Reported DLCIs gt Port1 Port 2 BRI B1 gt DLCI PVC Connection Status screen for the DLCI s Alternate Destination Main Menu gt Status PVC Connection Status Health and Status messages you should not see LMI Down for the port or B channel Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status For the ISDN B channel you can also view the DBM Interface Status Main Menu gt Status DBM Interface Status 5 12 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 5 Verify that the faceplate s BKP Backup LED is lit the unit is passing data See Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting of the User s Guide if the LED does not light 6 To discontinue the call once the backup path has been verified re activate the primary destination network DLCI at both ends of the PVC connection Manual Backup When There Is a Failure Use this procedure for total manually controlled backup when an alarm is received An alternate destination has to have been configu
228. nction key area 5 To save changes select Save and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen CAUTION Failure to save additions or changes to COM Port Call Directories will result in your entries being lost 5 8 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Creating Displaying or Changing ISDN Call Profiles gt Procedure To create display or change an ISDN call profile 1 Use the following menu sequence to display or change directory phone numbers Main Menu gt Control gt ISDN Call Profile 2 Select the number of the call profile to be created displayed changed up to 80 profiles one per backup destination in the ISDN Call Profile field If a profile has already been created for the number that you entered it appears on the screen Otherwise the fields are blank Either the Called ID or the Calling ID 1 2 for the selected profile appears 3 Enable or disable the selected call profile in the Status field 4 Review or assign a name to this backup destination usually the name of a site in the Destination field 5 Review or change the telephone number of the ISDN called or calling party identifier When the ISDN BRI DBM configuration option This field appears Originate or Answer is set to Called ID Originate Calling ID 1 and 2 Answer Make sure only valid characters are entered when changing the phone numbe
229. nd the backup interface For each data port For the network For the ISDN BRI DBM if installed Main Menu Configuration Ports gt Port 1 Port 2 gt Physical Compression Port 1 only a Frame Relay Main Menu Configuration Network gt Physical a Frame Relay Main Menu Configuration ISDN BRI DBM gt Physical 2 a Frame Relay 2 Make sure one end of the circuit is configured to originate calls while the other end is configured to answer calls August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Menu Sequences 3 of 6 Setting Up Steps for Setup Menu Selection Sequence 7 If 1MPort is not the mode wanted for automatic configuration of DLCls and PVCs select another frame relay discovery mode If using the FR Discovery feature connect the network cable at this time and allow the access unit to start configuring and cross connecting DLCI records Main Menu Configuration Shortcuts FR Discovery 7Port 7MPort default 3 1Port Compr 1MPort Compr 2MPorts 2MPorts Compr a NetOnly Disable To view automatically created DLCI records Main Menu Status LMI Reported DLCIis Network 8 Configure DLCI records for each data port network interface and backup interface 4 For each data port For the network For the ISDN BRI DBM if installed Main Menu Configuration Ports gt Port 1 Por
230. nfiguration Edit Display menu to display or change the configuration options for the FrameSaver access unit s alarm and SNMP trap information see Table 4 12 Alarm and SNMP trap configuration options control when and how alarm and trap conditions are automatically initiated by the access unit Main Menu gt Configuration gt Alarm Table 4 12 Alarm Options 1 of 2 ASCII Alarm Messages Possible Settings Com Port Disable Default Setting Disable Controls the generation and routing of alarm messages to an ASCII terminal or printer attached to the COM port either locally or remotely via an external device Com Port Generates and sends ASCII alarm messages to the COM port when the Port Use option is set to Alarm see Table 4 9 Communication Port Options Disable Does not generate ASCII alarm messages Alarm amp Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether alarm or SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically when the COM port connected external device establishes a connection with a remote modem If the call cannot be completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable the alarm or SNMP trap message is held queued until the call completes or until the maximum retry count is exceeded For alarms if more that one alarm message is received while waiting for a call retry only the highest priority alarm message is held all previous messag
231. nge the physical characteristics of the enabled data ports connected to DTEs see Table 4 1 Main Menu gt Configuration Ports gt Port 1 Port 2 column Physical B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Ports 2 The Ports screen appears Select to enable disable Port 1 and Port 2 3 Select Physical to change or display the physical configuration options for the enabled data port Both the local and remote FrameSaver access units are configured alike Table 4 1 Port Options 1 of 3 Port n Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the synchronous data port is being used and can be configured Port options do not appear if the port is set to Disable Enable The port is active and can be used to transmit and receive data Disable The port is not active When disabled port configuration options do not appear and control data and clock leads for the port are in the off state NOTE When the port is disabled the access unit aborts any active frame relay and physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Port Type Possible Settings EIA 232 V 35 Default Setting V 35 Identifies the interface type used for the data port EIA 232 The port is an EIA 232E compatible DCE An EIA 232 compatible DTE can be directly connected to the FrameSaver access unit and requires no adapter cable V 35
232. nit to be managed as an SNMP agent by an NMS supporting the SNMP protocol Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management Device Name Refer to General SNMP Management Options Table 4 15 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold SNMP Management Enable Disable Community Name 1 Public Name 1 Access Read Read Write Community Name 2 Name 2 Access Read Read Write 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 B 15 Configuration Worksheets SNMP NMS Security Options Worksheet B 16 Up to 10 SNMP managers can be configured authorized to send SNMP messages to the access unit or node Use this worksheet to record SNMP security information for each SNMP Manager Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security Device Name Refer to SNMP NMS Security Options Table 4 16 NMS IP SNMP IP Address Access Type Validation Manager 001 000 000 0001 Default in Bold Enable 1 Read Disable Read Write 2 Read Read Write 3 Read Read Write 4 Read Read Write 5 Read Read Write 6 Read Read Write 7 Read Read Write 8 Read Read Write 9 Read Read Write 10 Read Read Write 1 The periods between each set of three digits are considered part of the address field but are not entered August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Configuration Workshee
233. nnot be used to add or delete a circuit Indicates a DLCI s configured state if LMI Personality is set to None anda get is performed Changes how a DLCI is configured based upon whether a get or set is performed Supports only the following values m active 2 Indicates that the DLCI is active and enabled and can be used for transfer of information on the frame relay interface m inactive 3 Indicates that the DLCI is inactive or disabled and cannot be used for transfer of information on the frame relay interface August 1997 C 19 MIB Descriptions C 20 Object Description Setting Contents Circuit Statistics Contains the statistics fora The MIB objects and their frCircuit particular circuit These corresponding statistics are Entry 4 to 9 statistics manage the SNMP Managers to which the access unit reports traps Statistics are kept since the last Statistics Clear command was issued by the user or since the circuit was created if a clear has never been issued m frCircuitReceivedFECNS frDicmiEntry 4 FECNs Received statistic frCircuitReceivedBECNs frDicmiEntry 5 BECNs Received frCircuitSentFrames frDicmiEntry 6 Frames Sent statistic frCircuitSentOctets frDicmiEntry 7 Characters Sent statistic frCircuitReceivedFrames frDicmiEntry 8 Frames Received frCircuitReceivedOctets frDicmiEntry 9 Characters Received
234. nt Period TCP group MIB technical specifications kii 9621 A2 GH30 00 Telnet GL 6 and FTP worksheet B 12 limiting access Session user interface options 4 58 Terminal Port Use Test messages Tests aborting 5 36 available 5 23 determining status and results 5 36 device 5 33 Duration 4 50 interface MIB table Lamp 5 33 matrix MIB object commands performing physical PVC loopback starting or stopping throughput Timeout Inactivity Test Timing LADs 4 32 TM definition GL 6 trademarks A traffic shaping transmission MIB group C 15 Transmit Clock Invert Source transmitter transparent management control Trap Dial Out Disconnect Managers Number of 9621 A2 GH30 00 Index Traps authentificationFailure dialing out SNMP DLCI Enterprise Specific enterprise specific General Eers Link Link Interfaces 4 76 linkUp and linkDown selecting nr Ea SNMP options standards compliance D 1 supported warmStart troubleshooting access unit problems 5 19 data compression problems frame relay PVC problems ISDN BRI DBM problems TXC definition GL 6 TXD definition Type Port neue typical applications U UDP group MIB UL definition UNI 3 11 4 39 4 definition user to network interface 4 38 upgrade upload download capability user interface cannot be accessed communic
235. o learn how to create and delete logins Entering Identity Information Use the Device Name screen to identify this system and to change or display the general name location and contact for the system B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Control Device Name 2 Place the cursor in the field Tab to the field where you want to add or change information The following information is available for viewing Use the right and left arrow keys to scroll additional text into view If the selection is Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location FrameSaver access unit s physical location can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the system person can be up to 255 characters NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Return 3 To save changes select Save and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen Configuring the FrameSaver Access Unit Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver access unit operates Use the access unit s Configuration menu to display or change configuration option settings 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 9 Setting Up Configuration Option Areas
236. o the default value Cont d Cont d if not specified in the set PDU used to add a route ipRouteMetric1 Defaults to 1 hop ipRouteMetric2 Defaults to current slot for carrier devices and to 1 for standalone devices Do not specify a value ipRouteType Defaults to indirect ipRouteMask Defaults to what is specified in the MIB description Objects not used m ipRouteMetric3 ipRoutemetric4 ipRoutemetric5 Defaults to 1 m ipRouteNextHop Defaults to 0 0 0 0 Read only objects m ipRouteProto ipRouteEntry 9 Set to netmgmt 3 by the software May have the following values in the access unit other 1 Temporary route added by IP local 2 Route added or changed due to User configuration netmgmt 3 Route added or changed by SNMP set icmp 4 Route added or changed by ICMP rip 8 Route added or changed by RIP or similar proprietary protocol m ipRouteAge joRouteEntry 10 Reflects the value of the time to live for the route in seconds Defaults to 999 which represents a route that will be retained permanently m ipRoutelnfo Set to object identifier 0 0 since it is not used August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB Descriptions ICMP Group The ICMP Group objects are fully supported TCP Group The TCP Group objects are fully supported with exception to the tcpConnState object which is read
237. ocedures how to maintain directories and ISDN call profiles and how to reset or clear performance statistics and how to reset the access unit Also describes local and remote management of the access unit August 1997 ix About This Manual Section Chapter 6 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Glossary Index Description Security and Logins Describes how to administer security as well as instructions for logging in or out once security has been set up Backup security is also discussed Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screens are organized Configuration Worksheets Provides worksheets for recording configuration option settings MIB Descriptions Provides clarification for the MIB objects when it is not clear how the object definition in the RFC is related to the access unit Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Describes the access unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments dentifies cables used with the access unit and provides pin assignments for them along with those of the connectors interfaces Technical Specifications Equipment List Lists related equipment Defines acronyms and terms used in this guide Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections in alphabetical order August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00
238. odels currently support port and PVC multiplexing and PVC diagnostics CAUTION Responding to the prompt with a Yes will delete manually configured or changed DLCls and PVC connections as well as the automatically configured ones Respond with a No if you have any manually configured DLCls and PVC connections or Alternate DLClIs or connections Instead delete selected DLCls and PVC connections via the Configuration menu August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 gt Procedure Setting Up To select a Frame Relay Discovery mode 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Shortcuts FR Discovery 2 Select a Frame Relay Discovery mode Select FR Discovery mode If the access unit s application will be 1Port Only Port 1 will be used Compression will not be enabled A multiplexed DLCI on the Network side will be created for Port 1 data No management DLCls will be created 1MPort default Only Port 1 will be used Compression will not be enabled A multiplexed DLCI on the Network side will be created for management and Port 1 data 1Port Compr Only Port 1 will be used Compression will be enabled A multiplexed DLCI on the Network side will be created for Port 1 data No management DLCls will be created 1MPort Compr Only Port 1 will be used Compression will be enabled A multiplexed DLCI on the Network sid
239. of 32 control characters nondisplayed and 96 displayed characters Devices that can be attached either locally or remotely to display or print the access unit s alarm messages This feature allows a device to be controlled from an async asynchronous terminal like an ASCII VT100 compatible terminal A data transmission that is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a character five to eight bits and one or more stop bits at the end Attention Command Set A group of commands issued from an asynchronous DTE that allows control of the modem while in Command mode All commands must begin with the characters AT and end with a carriage return Asynchronous Transfer Mode Cell switching rather than frame relay technology An SNMP trap that indicates that the device has received an SNMP protocol message that has not been properly authenticated Access unit forces automatic redetermination of the DDS line rate speed 56 or 64 kbps as soon as a valid DDS network signal is detected American Wire Gauge An indication of wire size ISDN Bearer Channel A 56 or 64 Kbps channel that carries customer information like voice calls circuit or packet switched data Used for circuit switched information by FrameSaver access units Backward Explicit Congestion Notification A bit set and forwarded by the network to notify users of data traffic congestion sent in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN
240. of packet length Optimize Based On Possible Settings Throughput Latency Default Setting Throughput Specifies how operation is optimized via increased throughput or via decreased latency This setting affects compression for all DLCls Throughput Specifies increased throughput to maximize operation Latency Specifies decreased latency to maximize operation Select this setting when rapid response time is the primary criteria 4 30 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Setting Up the Network Interface s Physical Options 9621 A2 GH30 00 Select Physical to display or change the physical configuration options for the Network interface see Table 4 3 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Physical Table 4 3 Network Physical Options 1 of 3 Operating Mode Possible Settings DDS LADS Default Setting DDS Selects the access unit s operating mode based on how it will be used in the network DDS Specifies that the access unit is connected to the DDS network for standard DDS operation In this application autobaud automatic rate detection is activated each time the access unit is powered up or reset The operating rate is either 56 kbps or 64 kbps CC LADS Specifies that the access unit is used in a LADS local area data set application also referred to as limited distance modem or LDM In this application the local and remote access units are directly c
241. of the circuit is not a 9x20 9x21 unit these tests are disruptive to data Network Port BRI Internal PVC Loopback 5 28 The Network Port BRI PVC Loopback Internal loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames from one FrameSaver access unit node through the frame relay PVC to the same access unit node Main Menu gt Test gt Network Port 1 Port 2 or BRI B1 PVC Tests gt PVC Loopback Network PVC Loopback DTE J PVC aX I ellos t cast hess gt Network PVC X FrameSaver Access Unit 97 1544da If the selected DLCI is Then the PVC Loopback is Standard Disruptive Proprietary multiplexed Nondisruptive August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Send Pattern 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Port PVC Loopback DTE PVC x Se ae gt gj PVC x Network lt lt _ FrameSaver Access Unit 497 14930 02 BRI PVC Loopback DTE gt PVC X_ ISDN BRI DBM 7777 ISDN PVC X r E Network gt FrameSaver Access Unit 9 19301 NOTE PVC tests cannot be run and will not appear for a Port 1 DLCI that is configured for compression see the DLCI Compression option in Configuring DLCI Records for Each Interface in Chapter 4 This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected
242. ollowing values ClockSource for the port rs232Sync internal 1 The port uses an PortEntry 2 internal clock external 2 The port uses an external clock rs232SyncPort Specifies whether this Supports only the following value Rol 232 ice interf isaDTE ee ve noe mtertace is Or a dce 2 The port acts as a DCE rs232SyncPort Specifies the bit encoding Supports only the following value Encoding technique that this port rs232Sync uses m nrz 1 The port uses non return PortEntry 9 to zero encoding rs232SyncPort Specifies the method used Supports only the following values RTSControl to control the RTS signal rs232Sync controlled 1 For user data PortEntry 10 ports this value is used when the port is configured for RTS or Both m constant 2 For user data ports this value is used when the port is configured for DTR or None This is the only valid value for the COM port rs232SyncPort RTSCTSDelay rs232Sync PortEntry 11 Specifies the interval in milliseconds that the DTE must wait after RTS is asserted before it can assert CTS Supports only the following value 0 The port does not have to wait rs232SyncPort Mode rs232Sync PortEntry 12 Specifies the port s mode of operation with respect to the direction and simultaneousness of the data transfer Supports only the following value m fdx full duplex August 1997 9621 A2 GH3
243. onal information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use one of the following methods Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 813 530 2340 Trademarks All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners A August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Important Regulatory Information EMI Warnings A WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirements that no modifications will be mad
244. onnected to one another via a private 4 wire cable facility two twisted pair metallic continuity crossover circuits The operating rate is 64 kbps DDS Line Rate Kbps Possible Settings 56 64CC Autobaud Default Setting Autobaud Forces the line speed for the Digital Data Service DDS line This is the rate at which data is transmitted over the DDS line Only change this setting from Autobaud if the line speed previously provisioned by the service provider has changed or if the access unit becomes stuck in Autobaud mode DDS Line Rate Kbps does not appear if Operating Mode is set to LADS 56 Configures or forces the DDS line rate speed to 56 kbps Select 56 if the access unit is not running at the right speed 64CC Configures or forces the DDS line rate speed to 64 kbps Clear Channel 72 kbps on the line Select 64CC if the access unit is not running at the right speed Autobaud Automatically changes the access unit s operating rate to the actual operating line rate of 56 kbps or 64CC as soon as a valid DDS network signal is detected automatic rate detection It may take up to 15 seconds for automatic rate detection and adjustment to occur August 1997 4 31 Setting Up 4 32 Table 4 3 Network Physical Options 2 of 3 LADS Timing Possible Settings Internal Receive Default Setting Receive Determines the the access unit s timing source when it is used in a LADs a
245. oopback is an internal loopback that is located as close as possible to the customer interface serving the DTE Main Menu gt Test gt Network Physical Tests DSU Loopback DSU CSU Aggregate DTE DDS ae k gt Interface Network Port FrameSaver Access Unit 497 14933 02 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the PVCs assigned to the network interface In addition IP data sent over the PVC will be disrupted while this test is active August 1997 5 31 Troubleshooting and Maintenance DTE External Port Loopback Send 511 5 32 DTE External Loopback loops the user data port back to the DTE interface ona per port basis without affecting operation of the remaining ports This loopback is located as close as possible to the customer interface Use this loopback for isolating problems on the DTE port interface An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back Main Menu gt Test gt Port 1 or Port 2 Physical Tests gt DTE External Loopback CSU DTE DDS Interface Aggregate l Network Port FrameSaver A ni ameSaver Access Unit 497 14931 01 CAUTION This test may affect the operation of the PVCs assigned to this port In addition IP data sent over the PVC will be disrupted while this test is active This test sends the 511 test pattern over the selected interface The 511 test pattern is a pseudo random bit sequence PRBS that is 511 bits long on the data ports onl
246. ort 1 DLCI 201 Network NET DLCI 201 EDLCI 0 Management Internal Mgm201 EDLCI 2 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 3 7 Typical Applications The following shows the 2 port management configuration 2MPort DTEs DLCI201_ oyu Port 1 lt 7 Mgm201 4 ne DLCI201 Frame Le DLON ____ ___ PLCI 2 ee Port 2 NET Port letwor Network Side User Side Contains 3 EDLCls of LMI of LMI Port 1 Port 2 Management Mgm 97 15398 Physical Connection PVC Connection If the Primary Primary Primary FR Discovery Source Source Destination Destination Destination Selection is Interface DLCI Interface DLCI EDLCI Two ports with Port 1 DLCI 201 Network NET DLCI 201 EDLCI 0 Management Port 2 DLCI 201 EDLCI 1 Internal Mgm201 EDLCI 2 This example shows the 1 port non management configuration 1 Port Access Unit DTE oe DLCI 201 He DLCI 201 Frame ey oe oe ge Relay Port 1 NET Port Network J Network Side User Side Contains 1 EDLCI of LMI of LMI Port 1 Physical Connection PVC Connection 97 1540 If the Primary Primary Primary FR Discovery Source Source Destination Destination Destination Selection is Interface DLCI Interface DLCI EDLCI One port with Port 1 DLCI 201 Network NET DLCI 201 EDLCI 0 No Management August 1997 9621 A2 GH30
247. ort 1 only management DLCls multiplexed with port DLCls as the default a FrameSaver access unit can be sent to a remote site without preconfiguration other than the Node IP address Subnet Mask and LMI Protocol if Annex D protocol is not used The unit can be configured remotely through the management DLCI that is automatically discovered and created If 1MPort is not the setting required for your application change the application template before connecting the network cable or editing the discovered configuration option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver access unit will start discovering DLCls as soon as the unit powers up To recover from this problem if it occurs Select the desired FR Discovery mode and Save Save causes the Delete All DLCls and PVC Connections prompt to appear Entering Yes clears all DLCI records and PVC connections with exception to primary destination management PVCs configured on data ports Not deleting management PVCs on the data port ensures that the connection between the local router and the unit remains operational 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 15 Setting Up 4 16 NOTE If the unit at the other end of the network PVC is not a FrameSaver access unit FR Discovery mode should be set to NetOnly 1Port or Disable only one port can be used and no management DLCls can be created In addition PVC diagnostic tests cannot be run without disrupting data This is because only FrameSaver m
248. ort DTR the port is never down down 2 If the DTE supports DTR DTR is off testing 3 Test is active m BRI Channels DBM up 1 Call is active down 2 Port is disabled or no call is active testing 3 Test is active on the interface Frame relay DTE side up 1 LMI is up and frame relay link is enabled down 2 LMI is down and frame relay link is disabled testing 3 Test is active for any DLCI on the link m Frame relay service side up 1 LMI is up and frame relay link is enabled down 2 LMI is down and frame relay link is disabled testing 3 Test is active for any DLCI on the link 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 C 7 MIB Descriptions C 8 Object Description Setting Contents ifLastChange Indicates the amount of time Contains the value of sysUpTime ifEntry 9 the interface has been up object and running since it entered its current operational state Input Counters ifEntry 10 to 15 Collects input statistics on data received by the interface m iflnOctets ifEntry 10 object iflnUcastPkts ifEntry 11 object iflnNUcastPkts ifEntry 12 object iflnDiscards ifEntry 13 object a iflnErrors ifEntry 14 object iflnUnknownProtos ifEntry 15 object Output Counters ifEntry 16 to 21 Collects output statistics on data sent by the interface 1 ifOutOctets ifEntry 16 object ifOutUcastPkts if
249. ort is misconfigured or the access unit is otherwise configured so it prevents access Reset the access unit see Resetting the Access Unit s COM Port or Factory Defaults on page 5 15 Contact your service representative Device Fail appears on the System and Test Status screen under Self Test results The access unit detects an internal hardware failure Record the 8 digit code from the System and Test Status screen then contact your service representative An LED appears dysfunctional LED is burnt out Run the Lamp Test If the LED in question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 19 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Not receiving data access unit appears to be stuck DDS line rate speed has changed Excessive BPVs causing access unit to become stuck in Autobaud mode Excessive Loop Loss causing access unit to become stuck in Autobaud mode 1 Verify that your subscriber loop is running at 56 or 64CC kbps 2 If getting Excessive BPVs verify that you do not have a bad cable If the cable is good contact the network provider 3 If getting excessive Loop Loss dB indications install a shorter cable 4 Access the Interface Status screen and select Network If the DDS Line Rate kbps field shows Autobaud then the a
250. ossed Pair Detected Excessive Bipolar Violations BPVs linkUp No alarms on the interface Synchronous Data Ports Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port Alarm conditions include DTR Off RTS Off 2 Compression Connection Failure Low Compression Ratio linkUp No alarms on the port Network Communication Link COM Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port Alarm conditions include DTR Off RTS Off 2 Compression Connection Failure Low Compression Ratio linkUp No alarms on the port 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTR lead state 2 The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state August 1997 D 3 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps D 4 Interface linkUp Down Variable Bindings Possible Cause Logical Link Sublayer Represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table Service Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific F
251. otocol Management Provides network management via an external SNMP management system using industry standard and product specific MIB Management Information Base objects NMS Network Management System Support Supports the following SNMP managed system applications HP OpenView for Windows HP OpenView for Unix IBM s NetView AIX Local Management Provides local management through COM port for async terminal or NMS connection PVC connection configured for the DTE port Port 1 or Port 2 Remote Management Provides remote management Out of band using an external modem or an ISDN BRI DBM In band using the frame relay network Via Telnet Data Port Rates Supports 4 8 9 6 14 4 16 8 19 2 24 28 8 38 4 48 56 and 64 kbps With very bursty traffic where you want to reduce latency or when Port 1 has compression enabled supports additional rates of 128 192 and 256 kbps DDS Digital Data Service Rates Operates at 56 and 64 kbps clear channel August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 Multiple Management Paths Provides multiple communication methods for sending receiving management data Between the network management system and FrameSaver 9620 Between the FrameSaver 9620 and a router or internet device through the communications COM port Using in band management on either the network or DTE port A proprietary method using multiplexed DLCls call
252. ovides one and a half stop bits 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal user interface connected to the COM port Login Required does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms Enable Requires a login to access the user interface Disable Does not requires a login August 1997 4 53 Setting Up Table 4 9 Communication Port Options 4 of 4 Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for the asynchronous terminal interface connected to the COM port Port Access Level does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display
253. pears ready for input The DLC Number field is blank while the rest of the fields are filled with the default value settings NOTE If there are already 40 DLCls defined for this FrameSaver access unit the message No more DLCls allowed appears 3 Enter the network DLCI number supplied by the network provider 4 Determine the DLCI type that is determine whether the DLCI will be multiplexed If so change DLCI Type to Multiplexed 5 Change the CIR and or Excess Burst Size if necessary 6 Set the priority 7 To create additional DLCI records press Esc to return to the previous DLCI Records screen Helpful Hint Once you create the first DLCI record you can use the CopyFrom function to create additional records assigning a unique number to each new DLCI record Example First DLC numbered 16 Second DLCI numbered 17 8 Create additional DLCI records for the interface by selecting New or the CopyFrom function if needed and pressing Return Helpful Hint It is possible that the same DLC number is assigned to more than one port A DLC Records Configuration Worksheet is provided in Appendix B to help you keep track of DLC assignments 4 42 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up gt Procedure To create and configure a Port 1 DLCI record 1 Select Port 1 DLCI records Main Menu Configuration Ports Port 1 column DLC Records 2 Create Port 1 DLCI records and EDLCIs following the same procedure de
254. pplication LADS Timing does not appear if Operating Mode is set to DDS Internal Derives timing from the access unit s local clock Use this setting for the LADS primary timing unit that establishes the timing for both interconnected units Receive Derives timing from the line s receive signal except when the unit is running diagnostic tests that force the received signal to be the same as the access unit s tranmitted signal Use this setting for a LADS secondary timing unit NOTE Only one of the interconnected access units should be set to Network DSU Latching Loopback Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the access unit responds to the DSU Latching Loopback sequence sent by the network as specified by TR62310 Until the network receives the loopback release sequence the access unit remains in the loopback Enable Responds to the DSU latching loopback commands as specified by TR62310 Disable Does not respond to the DSU loopback commands or terminates the latching loopback test if active Causes the access unit to abort any active network DSU latching loopback tests NOTE Because the latching loopback code is a control sequence as opposed to a bipolar violation sequence user data may cause the access unit to activate the loopback test Use the Disable setting to provide a means of stopping the latching loopback test when the network did not command the te
255. pported on the synchronous data ports using the RS 232 like MIB Supported on the COM port using the RS 232 like MIB m SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol group System Group objects are fully supported by the FrameSaver access unit The following sections clarify the information accessed when these objects are used This object is set to display the following string Company enterprise s name DDS FRAMESAVER Model xxxx S W Release yy yy yy H W CCA number zzzz zzz Serial number sssssss Object What It Does Setting Contents sysDescr Provides a full description Company enterprise s name system 1 of the access unit its DDS FRAMESAVER Identity Model xxxx S W Release yy yy yy H W CCA Number zzzz zzz Serial Number sssssss sysObjectID Identifies the network Object identifier system 2 management subsystem based upon access unit s m 9620 1 Slot housing 1 3 6 1 41 company enterprise s ID 1 14 2 4 1 1 Example 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 1 1 sysServices Indicates the set of services Functionality supported system 7 supported physical 1 Layer 1 for all interfaces datalink subnetwork 2 Layer 2 frame relay for synchronous data ports and the COM port SLIP PPP internet 4 Layer 3 IP for all management links end to end 8 Layer 4 TCP UDP for all management links Object will be set to 15 1 2 4 8 August 1997 9621
256. pression performance Physical DDS network performance statistics collected count occurrences of the following no signal out of service out of frame BPVs and excessive BPVs Physical DTE port performance statistics collected count the following over and underruns CTS and DTR lost events CRC errors and non octet frames Physical DBM performance statistics collected if an ISDN BRI DBM is installed count occurrences of the following calls attempted originated answered and rejected as well as average duration Frame relay link error and LMI performance statistics collected count the following frames and characters sent and received and FECNSs and BECNSs received invalid frames short and long frames invalid and unknown DLCls and unknown errors and status messages reliability and protocol errors and inactives 1 6 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 PVC performance statistics collected count the following Tx and Rx characters Tx and Rx frames frames and frames dropped frames within and exceeding CIR frames with DE bit set BECN and FECN frames Compression performance statistics collected for selected DLCls count errored frames received on the network interface and history resets All but the DBM counters go up to 4 294 967 294 with a indicator when that number is exceeded the DBM counters go to 999 999 Menu Driven User Interface Provides an easy to use
257. ptions Configuration Worksheet 000eeeee eee eee B 12 Management and Communication Configuration Worksheets B 13 Communication Protocol Options Worksheet 045 B 13 Management PVCs Options Worksheet 00cceee eens B 14 General SNMP Management Options Worksheet B 15 SNMP NMS Security Options Worksheet 2 2 000 B 16 SNMP Traps Options Worksheet 0 0 cece eee eee eens B 17 Auto Backup Criteria Configuration Worksheet 2 0005 B 18 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Contents C MIB Descriptions 9621 A2 GH30 00 MIB II Descriptions RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 cee eee eee C 1 SYSOP GIOP aces apa there ney sabia nerene ee E ees C 2 Interfaces Group iiien eae eee eee aie ae ee ee ee C 3 MISH ACe Slack Glow isu owned ious beau Obes Pee babes belied C 10 Interiace Test Table ourer ncas eii vseet wath eanhe de aE C 11 Generic Receive Address Table ccc cece eee eee C 12 1 egt 210 a a E h aes eee eae ere eee E ete ee C 12 IOMP GIOUD cedre rioni Coes Ghai dau n eee Oe wee C 15 POP GOUD s asrni eae tine dae eens baad e da Coane needed C 15 UDP GTOUD crinca ee tet inne Ba et ed OE a ed ee C 15 Transmission Group s viene Sead aha de ah ea ee C 15 SNMP GOUD sees doceaw aa cs bine ewan erodes anebodwusgevebieaus C 16 Frame Relay DTEs MIB Descriptions RFC 1315 C 16 MIM GOUD reres neiaa aaa a i a eae ad a a C
258. r Valid characters Numbers 0 9 Space _ or readability characters To ensure that the DBM installs the correct backup configuration upon answering all calling party IDs must be unique across all of the enabled DBM call profiles The FrameSaver access unit uses the Calling ID to identify the remote unit and to determine which PVC mappings to use 6 To save changes select Save and press Return CAUTION Failure to save additions or changes to ISDN Call Profiles will result in your entries being lost 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Manual Dial Backup 5 10 Total manual control is provided for the times when automatic backup is not wanted An alternate destination must have been configured for a backup call to take place Use these procedures to verify connections with data being passed Refer to Step 18 of the Recommended Order for Setup in Chapter 4 Setting Up to verify connections without data being passed For an ISDN BRI DBM B gt Procedure For total manual control when an alarm is received 1 Configure for two sets of configuration options specifying different destination circuits following this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration gt PVC Connections Store one configuration specifying only the primary destination circuit in the Customer Configuration 1 storage area PVC Connections Save Customer Configuration 1 Store an alternate configu
259. r 3 or Level 21 1 Make sure you have at least one login with Level 1 security set NOTE See Resetting the Access Unit s COM Port or Factory Defaults in Chapter 5 should you inadvertently be locked out Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area To save changes select Save and press Return The Save Configuration To screen appears Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information about communication port configuration options 6 2 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet Access The FrameSaver access unit provides the following methods for limiting access through a Telnet session m Disabling Telnet access completely Requiring a user ID or password to login m Assigning an access level for the port gt Procedure To limit access through a Telnet Session 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display User Interface
260. r Detect CD lead is used to determine that a connection has been established Escape Sequence Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the COM port escape sequence used to switch an external device to command mode before the external device is commanded to disconnect ASCII text entry Adds to or changes the escape sequence maximum 20 characters Clear Clears and sets the escape sequence No escape sequence is sent out Escape Sequence Delay Sec Possible Settings None 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 Default Setting None Specifies the delay before sending the first character of the escape sequence and the delay after the last character of the escape in seconds During the delay no data is sent from the COM port None No COM port escape delay is used x x The delay 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 seconds used during the COM port s escape sequence You must configure this delay for there to be a delay greater than or equal to the escape guard time which is required by the external device Disconnect String Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the command used to disconnect an external device Refer to the Control Characters table on page 4 57 ASCII text entry Adds to or changes the disconnect string maximum 20 characters Clear Clears Disconnect String 4 56 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00
261. rame Relay Services MIB m iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m iffype RFC 1573 frLportVCSigProtocol Frame Relay Services MIB frMgtVCSigNetChan Inactive Frame Relay Services MIB linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured 3 or Frame Relay link is disabled linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled DTE Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay DTE s MIB m iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 m iffype RFC 1573 frDIciState Frame Relay DTEs MIB linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured 3 or Frame Relay link is disabled linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled 3 If the LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enabled or disabled August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Traps enterprise Specific Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps include the following listed in alphabetical order This trap does not have a variable binding Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause enterpriseConfig Configuration has been Configuration has been changed Change 6 changed via the user via the user interface or an interface or an SNMP SNMP Ma
262. rame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI Alternate DLCI is blank if the Alternate Link field is blank 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 14 Management PVCs Options 4 of 4 Alternate EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected for the alternate frame relay link EDLCls identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Alternate EDLCI does not appear if the Alternate DLCI field does not contain an Alternate DLCI that references a multiplexed DLCI 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Alternate Profile Possible Settings ASCII text Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate ISDN profile that is associa
263. ration specifying both the primary and alternate destination circuits in the Customer Configuration 2 storage area PVC Connections Save Customer Configuration 2 When an alarm is received manually load the desired configuration For example Main Menu gt Configuration Load Configuration From gt Customer Configuration 2 Once the alarm is cleared manually reload Customer Configuration 1 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Forcing Backup Manually Use this procedure to force backup when network maintenance is planned when equipment problems are reported or when testing the backup path whenever data needs to be forced from the primary destination interface typically the network to the backup alternate interface or path Manual backup calls can be made via an External backup device For the devices at both ends of the PVC connection Disable a primary destination network DLCI which has an Alternate Destination DLC configured on the data port connected to the external backup device following this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Network gt Port1 Port 2 gt DLCI Records gt DLC Status Inactive m Internal ISDN BRI DBM With Auto Backup enabled use one of three methods For the units at both ends of the PVC connection Disable a primary destination network DLCI which has an Alternate Destination DLCI configured on the ISDN B channel followin
264. rced Sends all frames whether or not sending them causes the rate to exceed the CIR for the DLCI Discards the frame if holding it causes buffer space to become exhausted Standard If sending the next frame causes the rate for the DLCI to exceed the CIR sends the frame with the DE bit set as long as it is within the excess burst size Discards the frame if it is over the excess burst size Buffered If sending the next frame causes the rate to exceed the CIR for the DLCI then the frame is sent with the DE bit set as long as it is within the excess burst size Holds the frame if it is over the excess burst size until sending it will not cause the excess burst size to be exceeded LMI Personality Possible Settings User Side Network Side None Default Setting User Side for Network interface and answering BRI B channel or Network Side for data ports and originating BRI B channel Configures the frame relay or LMI to assume the role of either the user side or network side of the UNI LMI Personality does not appear if compression is enabled and DTE Type is set to Bit Synchronous User Side LMI performs the functions specified for the user side of the UNI Factory default for the network interface and answering BRI B channel Use this setting when the interface is connected to a network Network Side LMI performs the functions specified for the network side of the UNI Factory default for the data ports
265. re To configure Port 1 for compression 1 Verify that Port 1 is enabled Enable is the factory default setting Main Menu Configuration Ports Port 1 column Physical gt Port Status Enable 2 Configure Port 1 for data compression Disable is the factory default setting Main Menu gt Configuration Ports Port 1 column Compression gt Compression Enable 3 Determine whether the attached unit DTE is a frame relay device and if not make the appropriate changes from the factory default settings Compression DTE Type If the device Then compression is done Supports frame relay On a per DLCI basis from the Port 1 DLCI Records screen Main Menu Configuration Ports Port 1 column DLC Records Does not support frame relay Over a single DLCI from the DLCI Records screen Main Menu Configuration Network DLCI Records 4 28 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 2 Port 1 Compression Options 1 of 2 Compression Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether or not the port performs data compression Enable The port performs data compression on up to six DLCls See Table 4 6 Disable The port does not compress data DTE Type Possible Settings Frame Relay Bit Synchronous Default Setting Frame Relay Identifies the protocol used by the data terminal equipment DTE Type does not appear if
266. re these records for reference as needed Refer to the appropriate configuration sections in Chapter 4 Setting Up for assistance when deciding how to configure the access unit When Using Auto Configuration Shortcuts 9621 A2 GH30 00 When the Auto Configuration feature is used only the local DLCI record and management PVC need to be configured that is the PVC connection between the unit and router By selecting a FR Discovery mode using the Auto Configuration feature DLCls are configured automatically and cross connected within the unit Refer to Using Configuration Shortcuts in Chapter 4 for additional information August 1997 B 1 Configuration Worksheets Entering Configurations Refer to Configuring the FrameSaver Access Unit in Chapter 4 when ready to enter your configurations Physical Interface Configuration Worksheets These worksheets are to record configuration options for the FrameSaver access unit s physical interfaces Network Physical Options Worksheet Use this worksheet to record the network interface s physical configuration option settings Main Menu gt Configuration Network Physical Device Name Refer to Network Physical Configuration Option Table 4 3 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Operating Mode DDS LADS DDS Line Rate kbps 56 64CC Autobaud LADS Timing Internal Receive DSU Latching Loopback Enable Disable Cross Pair Detection
267. red for a backup call to take place B gt Procedure 1 Disable automatic backup Main Menu gt Configuration Auto Backup Criteria gt Auto Backup Disable 2 Enable automatic backup when an alarm occurs which indicates loss of Network link LMI DLCI 3 Verify that backup is taking place by viewing the LMI Reported DLCls screen for the backup port Main Menu gt Status gt LMI Reported DLCIs gt Port1 Port 2 DLC PVC Connection Status screen for the DLCI s Alternate Destination Main Menu PVC Connection Status 4 Verify that the faceplate s BKP Backup LED is lit the unit is passing data See Chapter 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting of the User s Guide if the LED does not light 5 To discontinue the call disable automatic backup 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 5 13 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Managing the FrameSaver Access Unit 5 14 Local management is accomplished through the following methods DTE port configured with a frame relay management PVC with the router providing RFC 1490 encapsulation of the IP traffic COM port connected to an async terminal or other VT100 compatible terminal for direct access to the menu driven user interface COM port configured as an IP management link for Telnet access to the menu driven user interface COM port connected to the manager or router for an SNMP management link using UDP IP and either PPP or SLIP as th
268. relay operation Compresses data on as many as 6 PVCs on Port 1 and combines these with uncompressed PVCs The compressed Port 1 data can be aggregated with uncompressed data from Port 2 and transmitted on the DDS facility over designated frame relay PVCs Bit Synchronous Mode Used for DTEs that support any other HDLC based protocol Assumes Port 1 is carrying non frame relay HDLC like data This data is compressed and encapsulated onto a single PVC and combined with uncompressed PVCs from Port 2 See DTE Type configuration option description in Table 4 2 of Chapter 4 for additional information August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 Compression Ratios Data compression permits data coming from Port 1 to be compressed at ratios of 2 1 or more for greater data transmission throughput Up to six PVCs can be compressed Generally speaking English text yields a ratio of about 2 1 less structured data like binary files or source code yields lower ratios Compression is enabled on a per DLCI basis using the Port 1 DLC Records screen When a compression ratio threshold for the DLCI is set an alarm will be generated when the ratio falls below the threshold that was set Determining a Flow Control Method Flow control is a method used to control the flow of data from the DTE to the access unit and vice versa It is required to ensure maximum throughput as compression ratios vary according to the nature of the data
269. ress Subnet Mask and DSO allocations before the deployment of remote access units Refer to Using Configuration Shortcuts in Chapter 4 Setting Up for additional information August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About Alarms About Backup 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 The access unit can be configured to Send alarm messages to an ASCII terminal or printer attached to the access units COM port Dial out using an external modem connected to the access unit s COM port to send alarm messages to a remote ASCII terminal or printer See Chapter 4 Setting Up for assistance in configuring alarms and Chapter 5 of the User s Guide Maintenance and Troubleshooting for more information about alarms The access unit can provide backup using either an external backup device like a modem or an internal ISDN BRI DBM dial backup module Backup limits data loss when the physical circuit fails The main distinction between external and internal backup is External backup device The device can answer or originate backup calls one destination at a time The external backup device must provide backup security m Internal ISDN BRI DBM The DBM can originate or answer calls to or from another destination The DBM takes advantage of ISDN services for network backup and calling number identification service CNIS to provide backup security with ISDN assuring the integrity of calling party identifiers The backup f
270. ression connection if compression is enabled is established DTE Side of the Frame Relay Link iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 frCircuitDici RFC 1315 frCircuitState RFC 1315 enterpriseDLCInetDown in service side DLCI Status is set to Inactive The compression connection if compression is enabled fails enterpriseDLCInetUp in service side DLCI Status is set to active The compression connection if compression is enabled is established August 1997 D 7 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments COM Port 9621 A2 GH30 00 See the installation procedures in the 1 Slot Assembled Access Unit Installation Instructions for connecting the cables The COM communications port connects to a PC Personal Computer for front panel emulation or a VT100 compatible ASCII terminal or printer for alarms These cables are m 14 foot 26 AWG 8 conductor with a non keyed 8 position modular jack interface connector at one end and m 25 pin or 9 pin connector at the other end depending upon whether the FrameSaver access unit is connected to an async or other VT100 compatible terminal or a PC Refer to the appropriate cable section The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the COM port interface connector Signal Direction Pin DCE Transmit Clock TX
271. rfaces when an ISDN BRI DBM is installed two DTE ports and one backup interface Provides data prioritization based on PVCs Supports multiple PVCs on an interface Provides monitoring and enforcement of CIRs on a per PVC basis Supports the LMIs Annex A Annex D and Standard UNI user network interface management protocol August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 About the FrameSaver 9620 Frame Relay Aware FRAW Provides support for diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network Provides diagnostic capabilities including PVC loopbacks and pattern tests Supports in band management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Multiplexes management channels with the bandwidth of specific data carrying PVCs over the frame relay network using a proprietary mechanism Allows a dedicated PVC over a DTE port for management of the local unit This takes advantage of a router to provide management of remote units with which it is colocated Does not require extra ports and cables to get management data into the access unit via the router Data Compression Supports compression of data on one DTE port In Frame Relay mode supports selective compression of up to six customer configured DLCls In Bit Synchronous mode supports compression of HDLC like protocols with frame relay encapsulation over a preconfigured PVC Supports DTE port ra
272. ring device at the other end 3 Once aconnection is established between backup devices or DBMs the access unit switches data to the backup link alternate path that has just been established All reconfiguration occurs automatically within the unit entirely transparent to the connected DTE For circuit restoration 1 When the FrameSaver access unit detects that normal service has been restored the access unit clears the alarm and SNMP Trap 2 Data is switched back to its original path 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 3 9 Typical Applications 3 10 The backup link is always disconnected when one of the units of the backup link physically disconnects when the backup link LMI has timed out or when all alternate DLCls on the backup link become inactive If the backup link is disconnected but the failure is still detected the unit continues to try and re establish the connection until the failure is no longer detected The following sections discuss two backup applications backing up to the primary destination node and backing up to an intermediate neighboring node When backing up to a destination node two methods can be used m Analternate network like ISDN or POTS plain old telephone service can be used bypassing possible frame relay network problems This allows the units to completely bypass network problems and gives the operator more control Access to ISDN or POTS lines may be provided by the service provider throug
273. rminal Interface Telnet m External Devices SNMP Limiting Direct Async Terminal Access The FrameSaver access unit provides the following methods for limiting direct async terminal access on the communication COM port m Disabling the direct async terminal connection m Requiring a user ID or password m Assigning an access level to the port The Communication Port Options screen provides the configuration options to limit async terminal access on the COM port 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 6 1 Security and Logins gt Procedure To limit COM port async terminal access 1 5 6 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 Follow this menu sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display User Interface Communication Port The Communication Port Options screen appears Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable direct async terminal interface Port Use to Alarms connection Require a user ID or password to access Login Required to Enable Note User ID the COM port and password combinations must be defined Refer to Creating a Login on page 6 9 Limit the effective access level to Level 3 Port Access Level to Level 2 o
274. rotocols used Request to Send An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit CA ITU 105 an input signal DTE to DCE Received Clock An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit DD ITU 115 an output signal DCE to DTE Received Data An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit BB ITU 104 an output signal DCE to DTE Synchronous Data Compression See compression Synchronous Data Link Control This is an IBM link layer protocol Packet containing fewer than 80 bytes of data Serial Line Internet Protocol A link layer protocol used by IP Simple Network Management Protocol A generic network management system that allows the device to be managed by any industry standard SNMP manager Message sent by the customer s frame relay equipment to maintain its user network keep alive process and requesting a status from the network Network responds to each status enquiry frame Data with an accompanying time signal Virtual terminal protocol in the Internet suite of protocols Allows the user of one host computer to log into a remote host computer and to interact as a normal terminal user for that host Amount of data or the number of data units per units of time that pass through the network when it is operating a peak capacity Test Mode An ElA lead standard for V 24 circuit TM ITU 142 an output signal DCE to DTE A circuit capable of generating modulating and sending a signal for communication control and other purposes Trans
275. rs 4 Verify that data is passing between the DBMs Main Menu gt Status Performance Statisitics gt BRI B1 Frame Relay 5 Clear all statistics c and Return 6 Refresh the screen a few times Frames Characters Sent and Frames Characters Received Frame Relay Link increase when data is being passed Status Msg Received Frame Relay LMI also increases 7 If the originating unit is dialing but the answering unit is not receiving the call recheck the SPIDs phone numbers and Calling and Called IDs at both units 8 Reconnect the network cable to re establish normal operation 4 86 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance What Are the Troubleshooting and Maintenance Features The FrameSaver access unit can Detect and report faults Perform diagnostic tests Download software Monitor statistics Statistics are collected to help you determine how long a problem has existed These features ensure that your FrameSaver access unit is giving you optimum performance in your network How Do I Know There Is a Problem 9621 A2 GH30 00 The FrameSaver access unit offers a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems m LEDs Alarms SNMP Traps If monitoring the system the System and Test Status screen can also indicate that there is a problem Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status August 1997 5 1 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
276. rs screening all incoming calls and only accepting calls from devices using one of the specified calling identifiers 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 1 7 About the FrameSaver 9620 SNMP Management Capabilities The FrameSaver 9620 supports SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager using SNMP protocol MIB Support The following MIBs are supported MIB Il RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 Defines the general objects for use with a network management protocol in TCP IP internets and provides general information about the FrameSaver 9620 MIB II is backward compatible with MIB I Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 1315 Defines objects for supporting both the network and synchronous data ports when the interface is configured to support the User side of the frame relay UNI m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 Defines objects for managing RS 232 type interfaces e g V 35 RS 422 RS 423 etc and supports synchronous data ports and management communication ports on the access unit Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 Defines objects for supporting both the network and synchronous data ports when the interface is configured to support the Network side of the frame relay UNI Enterprise MIB Supports execution of PVC tests and the display of DLCI connections within the access unit as well as the devConfigAreaCopy group in the common area of this MIB which allows the entire contents of
277. rt s attached data terminal equipment using the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback Conirol Leads Supported Possible Settings Force DTR RTS Both Default Setting Both Determines which control leads are supported by the DTE The control leads determine when valid data is sent from the DTE If valid data is not sent data received from the DTE is not forwarded Force Interchange circuits from the DTE are not monitored Data sent from the DTE is always forwarded DTR and RTS will not be monitored but will be forced on internally DTR Monitors DTR to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE When DTR is off data sent from the DTE is ignored and is not forwarded LSD and CTS are dropped in response RTS Monitors RTS to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE When RTS is off data sent form the DTE is ignored and is not forwarded CTS is dropped in response Both Monitors both DTR and RTS to determine when the DTE sends valid data If either is off data sent from the DTE is ignored and is not forwarded 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 27 Setting Up Configuring Port 1 for Data Compression Select Compression to display or change the compression configuration options for Port 1 see Table 4 2 gt Procedu
278. rt Compr DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed CIR bps is automatically determined from LMI status update message if switch provides this information Excess Burst Size Bits is calculated as the difference between the CIR and the port rate Port 1 Physical 1Port Compr only Compression is set to Enable 1 Port 1 DLC Records DLCI Number is automatically created from the network DLCI Example Network DLCI 1001 gt Port 1 DLCI 1001 DLCI Status is set to Active CIR bps is automatically determined from the network Compression is set to Enable for the first six DLCls discovered 1Port Compr only PVC Connections Source Link is set to Port 1 Source DLCI is taken from the Port 1 DLCI Number Primary Destination Link is set to Network Primary Destination DLC is taken from the network DLC Number Primary Destination EDLCI is 0 Port 1 interface DLCI is automatically connected to the Network interface EDLC within the access unit 1 When compression is enabled on Port 1 only the first 6 DLCls configured will have Compression enabled and no EDLCls will be configured If Compression is manually disabled for one of the 6 DLCls the next new DLCI created will have Compression enabled 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 19 Setting Up 4 20 Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discover
279. rtain to tests commanded by the Network such as the network initiated CSU and DSU Loopbacks DTE such as the DTE initiated External Loopback A latching loopback is a network initiated DSU Loopback Once a DSU Loopback is started the FrameSaver access unit remains in loopback until it receives the loopback release sequence from the network The latching loopback code is a control sequence as opposed to a bipolar violation sequence therefore user data may cause the FrameSaver access unit to activate the loopback Disable the DSU Latching Loopback configuration option to stop the latching loopback when the network did not command the test Main Menu gt Configuration Network Physical August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests on page 5 36 When the status of a testis The only command available is Inactive Start Active Stop Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure B gt Procedure To start or stop a test 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select a group of tests for an interface Network Port 1 or Port 2 PVC or Physical Tests and press Return The selected test screen appears with the cursor positioned in the Command column of the first line available test
280. rvices the DBM can access All blanks is a valid setting 3 20 digits Where you enter a SPID number or you can leave blanks If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen If fewer than three digits numerics are entered an Invalid SPID must be at least 3 digits message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the SPID field so it can be re entered BRI B1 Phone Number Possible Settings 7 digits Default Setting Clear Provides the telephone number associated with Bearer channel 1 B1 All blanks is a valid setting 7 digits Where you enter the telephone number If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen If fewer than seven digits numerics are entered an Invalid Phone number must be 7 digits message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the phone number field so it can be re entered BRI B1 Manual Link Profile Possible Settings ASCII text entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the 8 character ISDN Profile associated with the remote unit Used when manually placing backup calls BRI B1 Manual Link Profile only appears when the ISDN BRI DBM Bearer channel is enabled and Originate or Answer is set to Originate ASCII text entry Adds to or changes the BRI B1 Manual Link Profile maximum 8 characters 9621 A2 GH
281. s Bearer channel All other ISDN BRI DBM Bearer channel configuration options do not appear when this setting has been selected Originate or Answer Possible Settings Originate Answer Default Setting Answer Specifies whether the access unit s DBM will originate or answer dial backup calls The DBM at one end of the circuit must be configured to originate calls while the other must be configured to answer calls Originate Places dial backup calls the recommended setting for a remote site DBM The Auto Answer configuration option does not appear when this setting has been selected Answer Answers dial backup calls the recommended setting for a central site DBM The Call Attempts Timeout minutes configuration option does not appear when this setting has been selected Switch Type Possible Settings NI 1 Default Setting NI 1 Specifies the type of switch used by the ISDN service provider This option is for informational purposes only This switch type supports the new national standard that all switches should support NI 1 NI 1 National ISDN 1 4 34 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 4 ISDN BRI DBM Options 2 of 2 BRI B1 Service Profile ID SPID Possible Settings 3 20 digits Default Setting Clear Specifies the SPID number assigned by the ISDN service provider for Bearer channel 1 B1 SPID numbers are used by the switch to identify which ISDN se
282. s documented in the RFC The number of ports is set to three two data ports and one COM port The General Port Table contains configuration options for the RS 232 Like interfaces Clarification for objects contained in this table as it applies to the FrameSaver access unit is provided below Object Description Setting Contents rs232PortType Identifies the port hardware Supports only the following values rs232PortEntry 2 type m rs232 2 Identifies the COM port or the synchronous ports configured as EIA 232 m v35 5 Identifies the synchronous ports configured as V 35 rs232PortInSig Contains the number of The value is 2 for synchronous ports Number input signals in the input and 0 for the COM port rs232PortEntry 3 signal table rs232PortOutSig Contains the number of The value is 2 for synchronous ports Number output signals in the output and 0 for the COM port rs232PortEntry 4 signal table August 1997 C 29 MIB Descriptions C 30 Object Description Setting Contents rs232PortInSpeed Contains the port s input Supports the following speeds for the rs232PortEntry 5 speed in bits per second data ports 4800 9600 14 400 16 800 19 200 24 000 28 800 38 400 48 000 56 000 64 000 128 000 192 000 256 000 Speeds available for the COM port 9600 14 400 19 200 28 800 38 400 57 600 and 115 200 rs232PortOut Contains the port
283. s installed and enabled When Clear completes Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen unless you are clearing a DLCI s statistics When statistics for a DLCI are cleared no message appears August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting Problem Tables Troubleshooting and Maintenance The FrameSaver access unit is designed to provide you with many years of trouble free service If a problem occurs however refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Access Unit Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs are not lit The power cord is not securely plugged into the wall receptacle to rear panel connection Check that the power cord is securely attached at both ends The wall receptacle has no power Check the wall receptacle power by plugging in some equipment that is known to be working Check the circuit breaker Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power Up Self Test fails Only Alarm LED is on after power up The access unit has detected an internal hardware failure 1 Reset the access unit and try again 2 Return the access unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales and Service Information on Page A of this document 3 Contact your service representative Cannot access the access unit or the user interface Login or password is incorrect COM p
284. s needed at a central or remote site is a matter of evaluating the site s traffic volume to determine the amount of network access required 56 64 kbps or FT1 T1 One of the most common and practical applications for frame relay access units is to use a 9120 T1 frame relay access unit at the central site and 9620 frame relay access units at most remote sites This arrangement provides the greater speed and capability needed for high volume central site applications while allowing each remote site to have a router for email etc and a cluster controller for SNA traffic The example that follows shows this application using a 9120 access unit at the central site with remote sites using 9620 access units m Atthe central site the 9120 access unit is designed to support up to 80 remote sites requiring a high degree of aggregation deaggregation In typical applications a circuit multiplexed PVC is expected from each remote unit containing PVCs from each data port plus one PVC for management At remote sites three multiplexed DLCls from each access unit are aggregated onto one PVC going through the frame relay network to the central site each access unit s multiplexed DLCI containing traffic from its two data ports with one DLCI for management 9620 TOK S Frame i Ring 9028 Relay FTA Compression Network Network Unit Frame Relay Cluster Controller Frame Relay Router Relay Cluster
285. s on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver access unit Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that the SNMP Management configuration option is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Desired configuration area Management and Communication General SNMP Management General SNMP Options SNMP Management Enable August 1997 Security and Logins 6 8 B gt Procedure To limit SNMP access through the IP addresses 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From gt Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 Follow this menu sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security The SNMP NMS Security Options screen appears Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Enable Specify the number between 1 and 10 of Number of Managers to the desired SNMP management systems that are number authorized to send SNMP messages to the access un
286. s well a monitor the results of the tests Fully supported except that the devPVCActiveTestDisruptive object is supported as read only Frame Relay Clear Statistics Group frame relay clear stat DFrameRelay 1 The frame relay clear stat group is used to clear statistics that are provided in the standard Frame Relay MIBs as well as the LMI and DLCI statistics This object is fully supported 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 C 39 MIB Descriptions Frame Relay Extension Group devFrExt 7DFrameRelay 4 The frame relay extension group contains extensions to the RFC 1315 and RFC 1604 MIBs that provide additional configuration options and statistics This object is fully supported Frame Relay Data Compression Group frNetDcp IDFrameRelay 2 The frNetDcp group frNetDcp mib is used to enable management of the Frame Relay Forum s implementation agreements for data compression FRF 9 This group is fully supported with the following exceptions Object Description Setting Contents frDcpPortFlow Control frDcpPortEntry 3 Indicates how data compression should occur All items but clock clamp 3 are fully supported frDcpDiciTable frNetDcp 2 Contains all data compression status and statistical information for a port or DLCI Allows m Clearing of data compression statistics for a port or DLCI m Enabling disabling compression for a DLCI All objects but the following are supported
287. sage ASCII Alarm 9621 A2 GH30 00 Index messages displaying and understanding test 5 28 viewing alarm MIB definition descriptions frame relay DTE Device Frame Relay service C 22 objects test commands RS 232 like support minimal remote configuration Mode Autobaud Bit Synchronous CIR Enforcement Frame Relay Operating protocol modular RJ49S network cable pins Monitor 511 test pattern 5 33 test pattern 5 30 moroa 9 LEDs multi homed host GL 5 Multiplexed DLC DLCI Type PVCs multiplexing an applications B 8 2 3 3 3 4 GL 2 N N1 LMI Status Enquiry N2 LMI Error Event N3 LMI Clearing nee NAM definition GL 5 Name 4 66 1 or 2 Access Access Net Link Port Use August 1997 IN 7 Index Network cable and pin assignments CSU or external loopback Destination Link DLCI records options DSU or internal loopback 5 31 physical options 4 311 PVC loopback 5 28 side LMI Personality 4 38 NMS definition GL 5 IP Address IP Validation SNMP security options support No Signal Alarm 4 32 Node IP Address Subnet Mask non latching loopback Number of Managers 6 8 Trap Managers O odd parity OOF definition OOS definition Operating Mode Optomized Based On organization of this document Originate or Answer Out of Frame Alarm Out of Service Alarm Out of Sync eee Outboun
288. scribed on page 4 42 Steps 2 through 7 Example Port 1 DLCls 101 and 102 See Table 4 6 for DLCI configuration options Compression Notes Remember if compression is enabled and the connected DTE supports frame relay configure frame relay configuration options for each DLCI If the connected DTE does not support frame relay create only one DLCI to carry compressed data If compression DTE Type and the connected is set to is set to DTE Then Enable Frame Relay supports frame Up to 6 DLCls can be Table 4 2 Table 4 2 relay compressed on Port 1 Table 4 6 Enable Bit Synchronous does not support Only 1 DLCI can be Table 4 2 Table 4 2 frame relay created on the port Table 4 6 3 If using compression change or verify compression configuration options for the data carried by this DLCI DLCI Compression DLCI Compression Mode DLCI Compression Ratio Threshold 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 43 Setting Up Table 4 6 DLCI Records Options 1 of 2 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 to 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error messa
289. ses the calling party identifier as the destination DBM or backup partner No additional security is required External Backup Device Using an external backup device for security it is expected that the device is frame relay compliant and provides security and calling number identification Controlling External COM Port Device Access The FrameSaver access unit allows you to control whether dial in access for an external device modem is allowed on the communication port Use the External Device Options screen to set the necessary configuration options to allow dial in access through the COM port B gt Procedure To control dial in access 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From gt Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display User Interface gt External Device Com Port The External Device Options screen appears 4 Select a setting for the Dial In Access configuration option To Set the Dial In Access configuration option to Enable dial in access Enable Disable dial in access Disable 6 4 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Security and Logins 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save changes select Save and press Return The Sav
290. sk and create a management PVC for this address and subnet mask prior to FR Discovery August 1997 4 21 Setting Up 4 22 Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 4 of 6 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is Multiplexed Management cont d 2MPorts 2MPorts Compr Network DLC Records DLCI Number is automatically created from the LMI status response message This DLCI will contain multiple EDLCls one for Port 1 one for Port 2 and one for management DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed CIR bps is automatically determined from LMI status update message if switch provides this information Excess Burst Size Bits is calculated as the difference between the CIR and the port rate Port 1 and Port 2 DLCI Records DLCI Number is automatically created for each port from the multiplexed network DLCI Example Network DLCI 1001 gt Port 1 DLCI 1001 Port 2 DLCI 1001 DLCI Status is set to Active CIR bps is automatically copied from the network Port 1 DLCI Records only Compression is set to Enable for the first six DLCls discovered 2MPorts Compr only m Port 1 Physical 2MPorts Compr only Compression on Port 1 is set to Enable 1 1 When compression is enabled on Port 1 only the first 6 DLCls configured will have Compression enabled and no EDLCls will be con
291. st Cross Pair Detection Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether to generate an alarm when a crossed pair condition is detected Enable Generates an alarm when a crossed pair condition is detected Disable Does not generate an alarm when a crossed pair condition is detected No Signal Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm is generated when a no signal condition is detected Enable Generates an alarm when a no signal condition is detected Disable Does not generate an alarm when a no signal condition is detected August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 3 Network Physical Options 3 of 3 Out of Service Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm is generated when an out of service condition is detected on the Network interface Enable Generates an alarm when an out of service condition is detected Disable Does not generate an alarm when an out of service condition is detected Out of Frame Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm is generated when an out of frame condition is detected on the Network interface Enable Generates an alarm when an out of service condition is detected on the Network interface Disable
292. st be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the duration of the user initiated loopback or pattern tests Test Duration min only appears if Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes inclusive Configuring User Interface Options Select User Interface to display or change the configuration options for the user interface The User Interface Options menu contains the following selections Communication Port m External Device COM Port m Telnet and FTP Sessions 4 50 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Setting Up the Communication Port 9621 A2 GH30 00 Select Communication Port to display or change the communication port configuration options see Table 4 9 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface Communication Port Table 4 9 Communication Port Options 1 of 4 Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Specifies whether the COM port uses internal or external clocking when set for synchronous operation For synchronous operation the COM port is always defined as a DCE This configuration option reverses the direction of the clock TXD RXD interchange circuits and allows the COM port to accept clocking from an external device Clock Source does not appear if Port Type is set to Asynchronous NOTE
293. stination link see LMI Personality the access units set up a frame relay link over ISDN or POTS line when the frame relay network connection fails This ensures that no matter what type of service is used for the alternate backup path the units can establish a frame relay user to network interface UNI between them Alternate Destination concept As part of this concept the DLCI data link connection identifier on the alternate destination link can be a different number than the primary destination link DLC numbers are assigned by the local service provider and they might not have significance to the destination unit and DLCI numbers must match at both ends of the circuit Configuring an alternate destination link and DLCI number allows a direct backup connection to be established by cross matching a source unit s DLCI number to an alternate destination units DLC number The example below shows an application using an ISDN BRI DBM to back up directly to the primary final destination Cluster Controller Frame Relay FR FR IBM FEP Frame ABRI APR Frame Relay a Frame Relay Router a Relay N BKP Router Access Access Unit with PVG Unit with DBM DBM FR Frame Relay Physical Connection 497 14896 01 PVC Connection Backup Connection The backup connection to the ISDN is via the backup BKP interface August 1997 3 11 Typical Applications In the following example a
294. t s alarm ALM LED will be lit August 1997 3 15 Setting Up Considerations When Setting Up We recommend that you decide how to configure the FrameSaver access unit before actually configuring it Appendix B Configuration Worksheets contains aids to help you configure the FrameSaver access unit Print out a set as you make these determinations When setting up the FrameSaver access unit you need to 9621 A2 GH30 00 Arrange for ISDN service if an ISDN BRI DBM is installed Determine where PVCs will be required in your network Refer to Chapter 3 Typical Applications for assistance Depending upon where a PVC is required and whether aggregation is needed determine the number of management PVCs that will be needed Decide how and when you will use the Data Compression feature Refer to Chapter 1 About the FrameSaver 9620 for basic data compression concepts when using this feature Determine whether you will be using the Configuration Shortcuts auto configuration feature when setting up Refer to Using Configuration Shortcuts on page 4 13 Decide how traffic congestion will be monitored which CIR enforcement mode will be used inbound or outbound and how much CIR and excess burst size will be required see About Congestion Control in Chapter 1 Determine whether you want alarms and SNMP traps generated and how you would like them communicated to an ASCII terminal printer or management system
295. t 2 DLC Records Main Menu Configuration Network gt DLCI Records Main Menu Configuration ISDN BRI DBM gt DLCI Records 9 Set up COM port call directories and ISDN call profiles If connecting to an external device e g a modem used for management via the COM port If using an ISDN BRI DBM for dial backup Main Menu Control COM Port Call Directories to create up to 5 directory phone numbers and one alarm directory phone number Main Menu Control ISDN Call Profiles to create up to 3 ISDN call profiles 1 Not necessary if auto configuration is used and management access is through the frame relay network 3 Provides access so that the unit can be configured remotely 4 If using the Auto Configuration feature make sure you do not duplicate DLCls August 1997 4 5 Setting Up 4 6 Menu Sequences 4 of 6 Steps for Setup Menu Selection Sequence 10 Configure local management DLCls and PVCs e g between the access unit and the router on the DTE port Local management DLCls and PVCs cannot be configured automatically Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communications Management PVCs 11 If manually configuring DLCls and PVCs not using the automatic configuration feature configure them at this time starting with DLCls Main Menu Configuration Ports gt Port 1 Port 2 DLC Records 12 Configure PVC connections betwee
296. t part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 2 has no DLCls defined Port 2 would not appear as a valid setting Network Specifies the network interface as the primary interface Port 1 or Port 2 Specifies the port as the primary interface BRI Specifies the ISDN B channel as the destination interface for backup Clear Clears the Alternate Destination Link and Alternate Destination DLCI settings and suppresses Alternate Destination EDLCI 4 48 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Table 4 7 PVC Connections Options 4 of 4 Alternate Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Data Link Connection Identifier DLC for a frame relay interface used for backup The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive Alternate Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLC for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a backup connection Alternate Destination EDLCI only appears if Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI r
297. t settings 1 At the async terminal that is directly connected to the FrameSaver access unit configure the terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set the async terminal s Flow Control to None Reset the FrameSaver access unit then immediately and repeatedly press Return at a rate of about 1 press per second until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the FrameSaver Access Unit from the Control Menu on page 5 15 to reset the unit Tab to the desired method and enter yes or y for the selected prompt If entering yes to prompt Then Reset COM Port usage Port Type is set to Terminal Data Rate kbps is set to 19 2 Character Length is set to 8 Stop Bits is set to 1 Parity is set to None External Device Commands is set to Disable Reload Factory Defaults All factory loaded configuration and control settings contained in the Default Factory Configuration configuration area are loaded If no or n is entered or if no selection is made within 30 seconds the FrameSaver access unit returns to the condition or operation it was in when the system reset was initiated with the COM port rate returning to its configured rate The access unit resets itself going through a Device Self Test Connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and
298. ta is always EDLCI 0 Port 2 data is always EDLCI 1 Management data is always EDLC 2 Port 1 and Port 2 interface and management DLCls are automatically connected to the Network interface DLCI 2 If the same DLCI EDLCI combination already exists no changes are made to the existing management PVC You may want to configure a unique Node IP Address and Subnet Mask and create a management PVC for this address and subnet mask prior to FR Discovery August 1997 4 23 Setting Up Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 6 of 6 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is NetOnly Network DLC Records DLCI Number is automatically created from the LMI status response message This DLCI will contain multiple EDLCls one for Port 1 and one for management DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed CIR bps is automatically determined from LMI status update message if switch provides this information Excess Burst Size Bits is calculated as the difference between the CIR and the port rate Configuring Physical Options for Each Interface 4 24 Configure the physical characteristics for the following interfaces Data ports m Network ISDN BRI DBM if installed August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Setting Up a Port Interface s Physical Options Select Physical to display or cha
299. te of up to 256 kbps with continuous clock rate flow control Supports short packet by pass mode Short packets will not be compressed and will be transmitted to the network using transparent mode Maximizes throughput by invoking a reliable protocol only when packet loss is sensed Configuration Shortcuts Provides simplified setup configuration and automatic DLCI configuration and cross connection Configuration Templates Provides templates that simplify setup of the access unit based upon how the unit will be used in the network Frame Relay Discovery Methods Provides automatic configuration of DLCls and connection to network DLCls 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 1 3 About the FrameSaver 9620 1 4 Integral ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network Backup If the ISDN BRI DBM option is installed provides automatic backup of data via an alternate route when network or access line failures occur Provides periodic testing of the circuit to assure that the switched network is available Supports automatic initiation of a backup call when there is a failure and establishment of an alternate data path so manual intervention is not needed Supports automatic restoration of data when service returns to normal Supports alarm generation and an LED warning when the network goes down Provides call security that restricts unauthorized access to the unit SNMP Simple Network Management Pr
300. ted with the remote access unit Those ISDN profile IDs that you defined using Main Menu Control gt ISDN Call Profiles will be available for selection Profiles are identified by number This configuration option only appears when Destination Link is set to BRI and an ISDN Call Profile has been defined Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Default Setting None for a port interface Proprietary for the network interface Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between access units RIP default settings None if the Link field is a data port Port n Proprietary if the Link field is set to Network None Does not use routing protocol Use this setting when the device at the other end of the management link is not a FrameSaver frame relay access unit This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on user data ports Proprietary
301. th a host computer that manages the lines and routing of data through the network August 1997 GL 3 Glossary FRAD frame frame relay frame relay header frame relay switching FRAW FR Discovery HDLC interface IP ISDN ITU LAN latching loopback latency LED LL LMI loopback GL 4 Frame Relay Assembler Disassembler The equivalent of an X 25 PAD a FRAD connects non frame relay devices to the frame relay network It also provides encapsulation and translation capability One identifiable group of bits that includes a sequence of bits for control framing etc A switching interface that is designed to get frames from one part of the network to another as quickly as possible The DLCI identifier contained within the frame relay packet The ability to route frame relay packets based on the source port and frame relay header DLCI The header contains a DLCI identifier that distinguishes the port for which the data is intended Frame Relay Aware Means the access unit can read the frame relay header and route the data internally to the correct port This function allows an access unit using RFC1490 to distinguish its address on an incoming IP packet and determine that the packet is for the access unit Frame Relay Discovery A configuration shortcut method for automatic PVC configuration within the FrameSaver access unit When the network interface is configured for the user side of LMI and
302. th has a CIR from 0 kbps to 64 kbps A proprietary method that provides the ability to multiplex the data of multiple DLCls or data coming from multiple frame relay devices onto a single DLCI sharing a single PVC connection Calling Number Identification Service A service package ordered from the service provider that supports ISDN Caller ID Communications port A computer s serial communications port used to transmit to and receive data from a DCE The DCE connects directly to this port With an access unit equipped with the data compression feature serial data coming in from the DTE over Port 1 is compressed at ratios up to 4 1 encapsulated into a standards based compression transport protocol then transmitted over the DDS network to frame relay PVCs Also called data compression or synchronous data compression Device software that sets specific operating parameters for the access unit Sometimes referred to as straps A feature that simplifies basic setup configuration of the access unit Based upon the application selected the access unit automatically configures certain options like DLCls from information obtained from the network Customer Premises Equipment Terminal equipment supplied by either the customer or some other supplier which is connected to the telecommunications network Cyclic Redundancy Check An error detection technique used to confirm the integrity of received digital data A series of two 8 bit bloc
303. the other ISDN BRI DBM must be configured as the network side see Table 4 5 the ISDN BRI DBM s frame relay options page 4 37 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 85 Setting Up Verify the ISDN BRI DBM Setup Once the ISDN BRI DBMs at both ends are set up and their ISDN lines verified you are ready to verify backup operation gt Procedure To monitor the backup operation 1 View the status messages displayed at the bottom of the screen lower right hand corner in the system messages and field values area Or go to one of the following screens DBM Interface Status System and Test Status the Health and Status column 2 If viewing one of the status screens select Refresh r and Enter to see the most current status B gt Procedure To verify the backup operation 1 Disconnect the network cable to monitor the results 2 Check the status of the FrameSaver access unit Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status gt Health and Status column 3 Wait as the originating ISDN BRI DBM places the backup call Status messages change as the originating FrameSaver access unit calls the answering unit and the originating unit s BKP LED starts blinking When the answering FrameSaver access unit receives the call its BKP LED starts blinking and the ISDN Active message appears The BKP LEDs of both units stop blinking and remain on when the connection is made and the Backup Active message appea
304. this feature is selected the unit creates a port DLCI for each DLCI coming from the network and connects the two DLCIs High Level Data Link Control A communications protocol defined by the International Standards Organization ISO A shared boundary between functional units Internet Protocol The TCP IP standard protocol that defines the IP as a unit of information passed across an Internet and provides the basis for packet delivery service IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP IP because TCP and IP are the two most fundamental protocols Integrated Services Digital Network Telecommunication service that uses digital transmission and switching technology to provide voice and digital data communications on a bearer B channel while sending signaling on the data D channel International Telecommunication Union Formerly known as the Consultive Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony CCITT An advisory committee established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies Local Access Network A network designed to connect devices over short distances like within a building A loopback that can only be initiated or terminated by the 64 kbps clear channel network service provider Time it takes to transfer data from its source to its destination Light Emitting Diode A light or status indicator that
305. tion avoidance and response capability that helps eliminates limited bandwidth bottlenecks while the access unit is in backup Even though the ISDN BRI DBM is used primarily for backup source and primary destination circuits can also be configured on a BRI If LMI is enabled on a B channel frame relay Link Status set to Enable and the access unit is configured to originate ISDN calls the unit dials to establish a connection immediately after power up just like any other interface with a source and primary destination configured If the B channel is used as a primary or alternate destination link the originating unit uses the call profile specified in the PVC Connection or Management PVC Table for the failed primary connection Should an entire primary destination link fail on the unit configured as the backup originator the first alternate destination link listed on the PVC Connection Table is used as the alternate destination link The ISDN BRI DBM terminates backup when the primary destination DLCls are active once again ensuring that the primary destination link and LMI are enabled When the LMI on the primary destination link declares each primary destination DLCI active the unit switches the data path from the alternate destination DLCI back to the primary destination DLCI When all alternate destination DLCls have been switched back the backup link is disconnected That is the B channel when the backup link is configured on the DB
306. tion worksheets 9621 A2 GH30 00 Out of Frame Out of Service Port Use viewing messages 5 3 alarms viewing Alternate Dial Out Directory 4 62 IP Address 4 65 Profile 4 69 Subnet Mask Alternate Destination concept Annex A and D LMI Protocol Answer phone call application data compression DDS access to frame relay applications using the unit in your network ASCII Alarm Messages 4 61 definition GL 1 terminal printer assigning community names and access ees BS IP addresses and subnet masks 2 13 async terminal GL 1 interface 2 3 limiting access asynchronous definition GL 1 port MIB table Port Type AT command set AT commands ATM definition authentificationFailure trap D 2 GL 1 August 1997 IN 1 Index Auto Backup based upon time of day configuration worksheets Criteria 4 77 feature auto configuration Autobaud mode Autobaud mode AWG definition B B channel GL 1 links backing up to a node 3 11 Backup applications Auto 4 77 cable and pin assignments E 4 Bearer channel BECN definition Bipolar Violation BPV Alarm Excessive 4 33 Bit Synchronous Mode protocol DTE Type BKP interface GL 1 BPV definition GL 1 Excessive Bipolar Violation Alarm 4 33 BRI definition PVC loopback BRI B1 Manual Link Profile 4 35 C cable COM port to PC terminal pr
307. to Enable BRI B1 set to Enable Originate or Answer set to Originate Originate or Answer set to Answer ISDN BRI DBM s B Channel Frame Relay Options Table 4 5 LMI Personality set to User Side LMI Personality set to Network Side PVC Connections Options Table 4 7 Source Source Applicable data source Applicable data source Primary Destination Primary Destination Link set to Network Link set to Network DLCI to the primary destination unit DLCI to the remote unit a EDLCI EDLCI Alternate Destination Alternate Destination Link set to BRI Link set to BRI Profile Called ID Profile Calling ID to the primary destination unit from the remote unit DLCI DLCI EDLCI EDLCI Auto Backup Criteria Options Table 4 18 Auto Backup set to Enable Auto Backup set to Enable August 1997 3 13 Typical Applications Backing Up to a Neighboring Node 3 14 Sometimes it is desirable to backup to a neighboring node like a regional node e g when the FrameSaver access unit is part of a mesh or partial mesh network or when only selected units are to place backup calls to the central site When the regional node receives a call from its neighbor the FrameSaver access unit switches the remote access unit s alternate destination traffic with its own primary traffic then sends the traffic to the frame relay network The application example below shows a remote acc
308. ts SNMP Traps Options Worksheet Up to 6 SNMP managers can be configured authorized to receive SNMP traps from the access unit or node Use this worksheet to record SNMP Trap information for each SNMP Manager Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Device Name Refer to SNMP Trap Options Table 4 17 SNMP SNMP Trap IP Address Destination Traps Manager 001 000 000 000 Default in Bold Enable 1 Default Disable COM PVCname 2 Default COM PVCname 3 Default COM PVCname 4 Default COM PVCname 5 Default COM PVCname 6 Default COM PVCname General Traps Disable Warm AuthFail Both Enterprise Specific Traps Enable Disable Link Traps Disable Up Down Both Link Traps Interfaces Network Ports All DLCI Traps on Interfaces Network Ports All 1 The periods between each set of three digits are considered part of the address field but are not entered 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 B 17 Configuration Worksheets Auto Backup Criteria Configuration Worksheet Indicate on this worksheet whether the ISDN BRI DBM is configured for automatic backup and restoral Main Menu gt Configuration Auto Backup Criteria Device Name Refer to Auto Backup Criteria Options Table 4 18 Configuration Option Setting Default in Bold Auto Backup Enable Disable B 18 August 1
309. tus as Active Inactive Created or Deleted Applies only to the user side of the UNI DLCI Status Change Alarm does not appear if LMI Personality is set to Network Side or None Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message if the network reports a status change for a DLCI Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message if the network reports a status change for a DLCI Configuring DLCI Records for Each Interface If Frame Relay Discovery Mode is not used it is necessary to create DLCI records for each interface If you do use Frame Relay Discovery Mode then it may only be necessary to create alternate backup DLCls and a management DLCI between the access unit and the router Configure the DLCI records for the following interfaces Data ports Network ISDN BRI DBM if installed DLCI records for all interfaces are created and configured in the same manner Procedures for creating DLC Records for the Network Data Port and BRI interfaces are shown in the following examples 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 41 Setting Up gt Procedure To create and configure DLCI records 1 Select DLCI records for the network port or ISDN BRI B channel Main Menu gt Configuration Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI gt DLCI Records 2 Select New and press Return to create a new DLCI The cursor is already positioned in the function key area so there is no need to press Ctrl a The Network DLCI Record Entry screen ap
310. tween the customer premises equipment CPE and a frame relay network to the public frame relay network facilities It provides a variety of features and capabilities which support Aggregated packet applications Data compression Diagnostic functions Management connectivity Automatic DLCI configuration and cross connection Automatic backup and restoration optional feature August 1997 1 1 About the FrameSaver 9620 What Is Needed to Use Access Units in My Network Features 1 2 The following components are available when including access units in your network Component Function FrameSaver 9620 Network Applications Module NAM Interface between the frame relay network and the customer premises equipment CPE Dial Backup Module DBM An option that can be ordered to provide backup internally so you do not need an external modem 1 Slot Standalone Housing Accommodates 1 NAM or NAM DBM Comes with a 120 Vac power supply and cord Used primarily at remote sites 120 Vac Power Supply Provides AC power for the housing 1 Slot Access Unit Wall Mounting Kit Permits the 1 slot housing to be mounted on a wall The FrameSaver 9620 offers the following features Frame Relay Aggregation Provides the ability to multiplex frames coming from multiple frame relay devices onto a single network connection or PVC Provides aggregation of up to three frame relay inte
311. u gt Configuration PVC Connections 2 Press Ctrl a to move the cursor to the function key area of the screen and select Modify The message Modify or Delete Connection ID appears 3 Enter the ID number for the PVC to be backed up and press Enter The PVC Connection Entry screen for the selected PVC appears 4 Add the following alternate destination backup information indicated on the PVC Connection Table Configuration Worksheet Set Alternate Destination Link to BRI Enter the Alternate Destination DLCI created for the B channel If there is a multiplexed DLCI enter the Alternate Destination EDLC created for the B channel Set Alternate Destination Profile to the ISDN Call Profile Destination 5 Press Ctrl a and Save 4 84 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up Set Up Automatic Backup B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Auto Backup Criteria 2 Enable Auto Backup 3 Press Ctrl a and Save Configure the Other End of the Circuit Follow the same procedures to set up the ISDN BRI DBM in the FrameSaver access unit at the other end of the circuit remember that m f the one ISDN BRI DBM was configured to originate backup the other ISDN BRI DBM must be configured to answer a backup call see Table 4 4 the ISDN BRI DBM s physical options page 4 34 m If the one ISDN BRI DBM had been configured as the user side of LMI LMI Personality
312. u selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Alarm Or configure the IP address and subnet mask Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management amp Communication Communication Protocol Frame relay PVCs to pass Assign IP addresses and net masks to each PVC to the management data node IP address if only one IP address per unit is desired Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management amp Communication Logical Communication Links 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 2 13 Typical Applications DDS Access to Frame Relay Application 9621 A2 GH30 00 The following configuration shows typical DDS access to the frame relay service with each FrameSaver access unit connected to a frame relay router Token Ring Frame Relay Router Access a Units Rey z 56K DDS El Unit Relay A 56K DDS Network Frame Relay a Router Physical Connection PVC Connection Ethernet 496 14895 PVCs In this example the access units use their physical connection to the DDS network to gain access to the frame relay network via logical PVC connections Access to the DDS network is through the units RJ48S interface FrameSaver access units operate at 56 kbps full duplex as shown above or 64 kbps clear channel operation if available in your area August 1997 3 1 Typical Applications Mixing Access Units in Applications Deciding which frame relay access unit i
313. ubleshooting PVC problems 5 22 frames 4 69 FRAW definition GL 4 FT1 FTP Login Required G gender adapter changer General configuration option table configuration worksheets SNMP managemert options Traps global objects MIB C 21 H HDLC definition I ICMP group MIB C 15 ID enterprise specific MIBs MIBs C 2 August 1997 IN 5 Index Identity entering information Ignore Control Leads Inactivity Timeout Inbound CIR Enforcement Mode 4 38 input signal table MIB C 33 installation documentation interface GL 4 EIA 232E port connectors pin assignments E 5 menu driven MIBs interfaces group MIB Internal Clock network loopback Transmit Clock Invert Transmit Clock definition MIB group route table Validation NMS 65 2 NMS number Node 4 63 IP addressing assigning addresses and subnet masks 2 13 direct PVCs to remote access units limiting SNMP acoes E7 management control scheme examples selecting a mes PA IP connectivity ISDN backup BRI DBM configuration worksheet B 5 physical options 4 34 troubleshooting problems 5 23 call profiles caterer aT maintaining call profiles ISDN U backup cable ITU definition IN 6 August 1997 L LADS Operating Mode 4 31 Timing Lamp Test LAN definition Latching Loopback Latching Loopback latency 4 30 GL 4 LD
314. unit s routing table supports a maximum of 300 routes even though a single route is all that is needed to reach every device on a subnet Have a default route set only for devices directly connected to the NMS s COM port Allow any legal host address for a given subnet the address choice within the subnet is not important to the unit but it should be selected in conjunction with all IP addressing for the subnet NOTE When dealing with IP addressing your Information Systems IS department needs to be involved since they typically dictate the IP addressing scheme used in an organization August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 IP Addressing Scheme Examples Management Control and IP Addressing The following examples describe some typical network scenarios they are not the only scenarios that can be used The subnet mask shown for each access unit is 255 255 255 0 Direct PVCs to Remote Access Units In this example Access Unit A is connected to m The NMS atthe central site Each remote access unit through a management PVC The illustration below shows three separate management PVCs one for each remote access unit 135 18 2 17 DLCI50 A EA 135 18 2 18 Frame c Relay _ _Network_ SNMP NMS Ethernet 135 18 40 1 LAN Adapter COM Port IP Address 135 18 40 3 135 18 2 26 P S EA Subnet 135 18 2 0 Physical Connection 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 135 18 2 1 Su
315. uration worksheets Completing the following configuration worksheets before you start configuring the unit will speed setup time ISDN BRI DBM Options Worksheet Frame Relay Options Worksheet DLCI Records Configuration Worksheet PVC Connection Table Configuration Worksheet Begin setup of the ISDN BRI DBM following the procedures in this section Perform them in the order presented 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 4 79 Setting Up Configure the ISDN BRI DBM Interface 4 80 gt Procedure 1 Disable or verify that Auto Backup is disabled using the following menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Auto Backup Criteria Helpful Hint Pressing the up arrow key 1 with the cursor on the first menu selection moves the cursor to the last menu selection on the screen Pressing the down arrow J with the cursor on the last menu selection moves the cursor to the first menu selection Enable the ISDN BRI B channel Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN BRI DBM Physical gt BRI B1 Helpful Hint Available selections appear near the bottom of the screen in the system messages and field values area under the function keys See screen example in Chapter 2 of the User s Guide Screen Work Areas Configure the ISDN BRI DBM interface s physical characteristics as indicated on the ISDN BRI DBM Options Worksheet Specify whether the DBM will Originate or Answer backup calls Enter the SPID
316. ured PVCs 1 for Management Data 1 for Customer Data e 1 Cable Physical Connection PVC Connection 97 14991 01 In this configuration the access unit depends on the router for management connectivity Only one DTE port is needed since the user data PVCs share the same port as the management PVC No additional cables need to be purchased NOTE The router to be used for management must configure a PVC to support RFC 1490 This allows the access unit to recognize its IP data When a PVC is configured as the IP management link the async terminal interface is accessible through Telnet When this is the case you also need to enable Telnet and FTP Sessions configuration options Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration User Interface Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 2 August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Management Control and IP Addressing Creating a Separate Management Link Non RFC 1490 Router Using COM Port A dedicated PVC can be configured to carry customer data over a DTE port while management data is carried over the COM port The illustration below shows a management link connected to the COM port for local access to a non RFC 1490 router When the COM port is configured as the IP management link the user interface is also accessible via Telnet Although not shown in the illustration below a LAN adapter can be connected to the COM port to provide Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity or an async term
317. using the following menu sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps The SNMP Trap Options screen appears Dialing Out and Sending SNMP Traps You can control whether generated SNMP trap messages will initiate a call if a connection on the COM port external device has not already been established Use the Alarms Options screen to enable the FrameSaver access unit s automatic call initiation dial out on the COM port external device to send an SNMP trap message B gt Procedure 1 5 6 Assign SNMP Trap Managers See Setting Up for SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4 Setting Up Select the desired SNMP traps See Selecting SNMP Traps on page 5 6 Set up the COM Port Call Directories under the Control menu and select a directory via the COM Port Call Setup screen Set up the A directory as the primary alarm directory You can also set up an alternate directory refer to Displaying or Changing COM Port Directory Numbers on page 5 8 Specify the IP address es of the NMS to send traps to when dialing out Use the Configuration Management and Communication SNMP NMS Security menu sequence See Setting Up for SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4 Setting Up Enable the Call Retry and Alarm amp Trap Dial Out configuration options to hold the call if it cannot be completed The call is held until completed or the maximum retry count maximum 5 has been exceeded You can also set the delay ti
318. ust 1997 1 5 About the FrameSaver 9620 Extensive Monitoring Capability Provides status information to help you keep track of and evaluate the unit s and network s operation via Status Branch Menu Provides system and test status LMI local management interface reported DLCI statuses on each interface source and destination PVC permanent virtual circuit connection statuses for each interface and DBM interface status information Performance Statistics Provides physical and frame relay statistics for each interface and PVC and compression statistics for each DLCI Faceplate LEDs Provides unit and interface monitoring that includes network and synchronous data port statuses as well as backup status if an ISDN BRI DBM is installed An additional feature allows you to select which DTE port is being monitored via the faceplate LEDs as well as allowing you to monitor all LEDs via the user interface Extensive Statistics Gathering Provides a complete view of the network s each data port s and the DBM s if installed and enabled performance through the statistical data collected from those interfaces to assist in determining the duration of a condition or event Quick and easy access to seven sets of statistics is provided selectable from a menu You can select a set of statistics for each interface s physical performance frame relay link error and LMI performance as well as PVC and com
319. uts have been provided to simplify configuration of the FrameSaver 9620 and its features Two types of configuration aids have been provided Configuration Templates Used primarily during initial configuration when setting up the access unit Each template enables or disables port configuration options Selecting a configuration template that indicates the DTE ports that will be used causes the appropriate ports and options to be enabled or disabled Only enabled port configuration options appear for customization FR Discovery Method Used for automatic PVC configuration within the access unit when the network interface is configured as the user side of LMI the usual configuration For each DLCI coming from the network the unit creates a port DLCI then connects them automatically A discovery method must be selected for network to port DLCls to be connected These configuration aids can be used together or they can be used independent of one another Initially this feature can be used to speed setup of the FrameSaver 9620 Then by selecting a frame relay discovery method configuration and cross connection of DLCls can be performed within the access unit on an automatic and continuing basis NOTE If using the frame relay automatic configuration feature FR Discovery and the service provider does not use Annex D protocol it is recommended that the network interface s LMI Protocol be pre configured along with the Node IP Add
320. value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive Primary Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Primary Destination EDLCI only appears if Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Primary Destination Profile Possible Settings ASCII text Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination ISDN profile associated with the remote unit Those ISDN profile IDs that you defined using Main Menu Control gt ISDN Call Profiles will be available for selection Profiles are identified by number This configuration option only appears when Primary Destination Link is set to BRI and an ISDN Call Profile has been defined Alternate Destination Link Possible Settings Network Port 1 Port 2 BRI Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the alternate destination link the to end of a from to link that is used for backup when the primary destination link or DLCI is out of service The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are no
321. ve humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C Up to 90 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling August 1997 F 1 Technical Specifications F 2 Specification Criteria Assembled 1 Slot FrameSaver Access Unit Power Consumption and Dissipation 120 Vac power supply Built in power cord Power consumption Normal service voltage ranges 80 220 Vac universal power supply Built in power cord Power consumption Normal service voltage ranges NEMA 5 15P plug 120 Vac 60 Hz 153 mA Average power 9 5 W 120 Vac 12 Vac 60 Hz wo NEMA 5 15P plug 100 Vac 240 Vac 0 7A 50 60 Hz 100 240 Vac 12 Vac 2 5A 12 Vdc 50 60 Hz COM Port Interface Communications Management Data rates 8 position modular unkeyed jack 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 and 38 4 kbps Ports 1 and 2 DTE Synchronous Data Ports Standards Data rates 25 position DB25 subminiature connectors EIA 232E V 24 V 35 4 8 9 6 14 4 16 8 19 2 24 28 8 38 4 48 56 64 128 192 and 256 kbps DDS Network NET Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada 8 position modular keyed USOC jack 56 kbps and 64 kbps clear channel 4 wire service frame relay service LADs RJ48S CA48S Backup BKP Interface ISDN BRI DBM Backup Physic
322. ver 9620 Throughput Protocol Modes 1 12 Throughput i e bits per second is the amount of data or number of data units per units of time that passes through the network Throughput is a result of Network and port rates Network error rate affecting packet loss and the need to retransmit Compression ratio achievable for the data being transmitted Protocol overhead imposed by compression and frame relay Latency imposed between two FrameSaver 9620s and by the network Consider these and the following information when the data compression feature is enabled Generally speaking flow control is necessary especially when packet sizes are large and files are compressed Flow control and compression are less effective when sending short packets When flow control is not used when the DTE cannot accept flow control transmitter overruns are likely reducing performance Selecting Clock rate control as the flow control method minimizes latency and prevents transmitter overruns and underruns The type of data being compressed determines throughput The more structured the data the more compressible the more random the less compressible NOTE It is recommended that data compression be enabled on only one device on the data stream e g access unit s data compression enabled server s data compression disabled Data compression supports two protocol modes Frame Relay Mode Used for DTEs that support frame
323. ver the same PVC a separate dedicated management PVC is not required 1 PVC f N SNMP NMS Frame Relay Network Access Unit B Access Unit A Link 1 Cable 1 Cable Emulation 2 PVCs and Telnet or NMS using Frame Frame SNMP Relay Relay RFC 1490 RFC 1490 II Router B II Router A Physical Connection PVC Connection 97 14960a August 1997 2 7 Management Control and IP Addressing Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme 2 8 You can select from many IP addressing schemes to provide SNMP NMS connectivity When selecting a scheme keep the following in mind Because connection to remote devices is through PVCs if desired you can assign IP addresses and subnet masks to each PVC individually Avoid multiple management PVC connections between the same two devices to prevent routing loops Assign IP addresses on a per interface or access unit basis Although routing information is automatically passed between interconnected access units from the network side make sure to set a route to the subnet s in the NMS s or local router s routing table The gateway to subnet s is through the access unit connected to The LAN using a LAN adapter or Toa router s terminal server s or NMS s direct PPP point to point protocol or SLIP s link layer protocol for IP traffic serial connection or The router s DTE port using a local PVC Be aware that each access
324. word again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save login information select Save and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen The cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry Refer to Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information about security and login configuration options Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the Communication Port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session 9621 A2 GH30 00 August 1997 6 9 Security and Logins Deleting a Login A login record can be deleted gt Procedure To delete a login record 1 Follow this menu sequence Main Menu gt Control Administer Logins 2 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 3 Select PgUp or PgDn and press Return to page through login pages records until you find the one to be deleted 4 Once the correct record is displayed select Delete and press Return 5 To save the deletion select Save and press Return When the deletion is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen The number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record following the deleted record appears Example Page 2 of 4
325. y This is a PRBS 29 1 test Main Menu gt Test gt Network Port 1 or Port 2 Physical Tests Send 511 When sending or monitoring a 511 test pattern using an external loopback connector on the network or DTE port you must follow the sequence below for these tests to run correctly B gt Procedure To send a 511 test pattern using an external loopback connector 1 Remove the network cable so that a No Signal NS condition occurs 2 Start the Send Pattern test 3 Place the loopback cable on the network or DTE port interface 4 Start the Monitor 511 test August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Monitor 511 For Monitor 511 a 511 test pattern being sent over the network or DTE port interface can be monitored To view the test results see the Network or Port n Physical Tests screen Main Menu gt Test gt Network Port 1 or Port 2 Physical Tests gt Monitor 511 The current number of bit errors is shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver access unit is in sync An Out of Sync message appears when the test pattern generator and receiver have not yet synchronized This error count is updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 is shown in the field NOTE The 511 monitor expects external equipment to provide the clock for the 511 pattern for timing the incoming pattern on interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC with t
326. y Mode 2 of 6 If the mode selected is Then setup configuration is Multiplexed Management 1MPort 1MPort Compr Network DLC Records DLCI Number is automatically created from the LMI status response message This DLCI will contain multiple EDLCls one for Port 1 and one for management DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed CIR bps is automatically determined from LMI status update message if switch provides this information Excess Burst Size Bits is calculated as the difference between the CIR and the port rate Port 1 Physical 1MPort Compr only Compression is set to Enable 1 Port 1 DLC Records DLCI Number is automatically created for Port 1 from the multiplexed network DLCI Example Network DLCI 1001 gt Port 1 DLCI 1001 DLCI Status is set to Active CIR bps is automatically copied from the network Compression is set to Enable for the first six DLCls discovered 1 MPort Compr only 1 When compression is enabled on Port 1 only the first 6 DLCls configured will have Compression enabled and no EDLCls will be configured If Compression is manually disabled for one of the 6 DLCls the next new DLCI created will have Compression enabled August 1997 9621 A2 GH30 00 Setting Up 9621 A2 GH30 00 Automatic Configuration for Selected Frame Relay Discovery Mode 3 of 6 If the mode

frame relay access unit model 9620/9621

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents